JP6875321B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).

Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).

The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.

Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to suggest that a specific display corresponding to a variable display can be displayed and controlled to an advantageous state by changing the display mode of the specific display to any one of a plurality of types. There is one configured in. For example, in Patent Document 1, an item image imitating a flame bullet moves toward the hold icon while drawing a parabolic trajectory, hits the hold icon of the target, a smoke screen is generated, and the hold icon is displayed on the LCD screen. By disappearing from the top, the smoke screen disappears and the hold icon is changed from the secret state to the disclosure state, and at least one or the shape of the hold display mode of the hold icon hit by the flame bullet changes. It is stated that it can be done.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-422444 (paragraphs 0389, 0392, 0394, FIG. 54).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, when the display mode of the specific display (hold icon) changes, it becomes invisible due to the smoke screen, and the effect of displaying the specific display is sufficiently enhanced. I couldn't.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of producing a specific display.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example,). The specific display execution means (for example, a portion for executing steps S627, S631, S634, S637, S8002, S8300 in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of displaying the hold display and the active display) is provided, and the specific display execution means is provided. After performing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes, the display mode of the specific display is changed to one of a plurality of types of display modes (for example, triangle display, diamond display, star display). It is possible to suggest that the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, the portion where step S8109 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the post-change display is started at the timing when the display mode of the specific display is changed. after starting the display after the change, a predetermined period (e.g., 2,0 seconds or 5.0 seconds) the post-change display over (e.g., reverberation effect) is capable of displaying specific indication in a manner involving (e.g., effect (Part of executing step S8107 in the control microcomputer 100), the specific display can be displayed so that it can be recognized which display mode the specific display has changed even in the state accompanied by the display after the change (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 33 (5), (6), 34 (5), (6), 35 (5), (6), and 36 (5), (6), the afterglow effect is being executed. (Even a part of the hold display and the active display after the change can be visually recognized), the suggestion effect is executed for a common period regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state, and after the change. When the display period of the display is long, the display means is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the display period of the display after the change is short, and the display means and the warning image regarding the prevention of immersiveness in the game are used as the display means. It is further provided with a displayable alerting means (for example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control that displays a immersive prevention image 90131), and the alerting means is a standby state in which a demonstration can be displayed (for example, a customer waiting demo state, etc.). At the time of and when the advantageous state ends (for example, the ending period, etc.), it is possible to execute a warning regarding the prevention of squeezing (for example, displaying the squeezing prevention image 90131). advantageous The alert image is displayed on the display means in a manner different from that when the state is terminated (for example, in the customer waiting demo state, as shown in FIG. 55 (h), the effect display device 909 is sunk into the lower part of the screen. The prevention image 90131 is displayed in a large size, and during the ending period, the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 58 (b). The display period of the entanglement prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the state), after the gaming machine is powered off in the standby state and the gaming machine recovers from the power failure. in no event controlled in the standby state, the period from being controlled in the standby state until displaying the reminder image on the display means, control the standby state from the game machine is initialized in no event, which is characterized by varying the, and duration from being controlled in the standby state until displaying the reminder image on the display means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying a specific display. In addition, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

(Means 2) In means 1, sound output means (for example, step S8110 in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting sounds (for example, effect sound α and effect sound β) corresponding to the display mode after the change of the specific display. The sound output means can output a sound so that it can recognize which display mode the specific display has changed even in a state accompanied by a display after the change (for example, FIG. 24). As shown in the above, when the final display mode is a triangular display or a diamond-shaped display, the effect sound α is output, and when the final display mode is a star-shaped display, the effect sound β is output). You may. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying a specific display.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2, an action effect (for example, FIGS. 33 (2) to (4), FIGS. 34 (2) to (4), and FIG. 35 (2) is executed according to an aspect that acts on a specific display. )-(4) and the action effect executing means (for example, the action effect as shown in FIGS. 36 (2) to (4)) (for example, a step according to the process table selected in step S8012 in the effect control microcomputer 100). The action effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of action effects (for example, the action effects A to C shown in FIG. 27), and the specific display execution means is executed. It is possible to display a common post-change display regardless of the type of action effect (for example, FIGS. 33 (5), (6), 34 (5), (6), 35 regardless of the type of action effect. (5), (6), and the afterglow effect is executed in the common effect mode shown in FIGS. 36 (5) and (6)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect while suppressing an increase in the data capacity.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to means 3, the specific display executing means can display a common post-change display regardless of which display mode the specific display is changed to (for example,). FIGS. 33 (5), (6), 34 (5), (6), 35 (5), (6), and 36 (6), regardless of the final display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified. 5), the afterglow effect may be executed in the common effect mode shown in (6)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect while suppressing an increase in the data capacity.

(Means 5) In any of the means 1 to the means 4, the degree of expectation differs depending on the ratio between the display period of the post-change display and the period in which the specific display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change (for example, FIG. 29 and FIG. 29 and As shown in FIG. 30, as the value of the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period in which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed increases depending on the display mode after the change, the degree of expectation for the jackpot ( The jackpot reliability) may be high). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying a specific display.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to 5, the specific display executing means displays the specific display (for example, hold display, active display) in at least a normal mode (for example, "white") and a normal mode. It is possible to display in any display mode including a first specific mode (for example, "red") having a higher expectation and a second specific mode (for example, a special suggestion mode) that suggests the content of the effect (for example). For example, in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the second embodiment, a portion in which the hold display can be displayed in "white" or "red" or a special suggestion mode (see FIG. 37), a specific display in the second specific mode. The effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by (for example, the portion capable of executing the special zone effect suggested by the special suggestion mode in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the second embodiment (FIG.). 37 (5), (6))), the specific display executing means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed. At that time, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the second embodiment is special as shown in FIG. 37. The hold display 153 displayed in the special suggestion mode can be changed to "red" 5 seconds after the zone effect is started). According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for a specific aspect.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to the means 6, after displaying the specific display by the first aspect (for example, special hold), a change effect (for example, an action effect) for changing the display mode of the specific display is performed. The change effect execution means (for example, the change pattern shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the third embodiment) for executing the accompanying hold notice effect) is used for the hold display or the active display. The change effect executing means includes a portion that changes the display mode, and after displaying the specific display by the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the second mode (for example, blue hold) having a high advantage. It is possible to execute the effect of changing to (or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to 41 (I)). (It is possible to execute the original hold notice effect), and as a change effect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display by the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed. It is possible to execute the effect of changing to the third aspect (for example, normal hold) (for example, hold notice based on the change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40 (C) and the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F)). The specific display displayed by the third aspect has a lower rate of change to the second aspect than the specific display displayed by the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41). In addition, the change pattern that changes from special hold to normal hold and then to red hold is only the change pattern 411,414 that can be selected only when the first hold memory number is 4 at the start winning and the super reach jackpot. , Judgment value allocation is extremely small, and the change patterns 31, 32, 401 to 404, which do not change while being normally held, have more judgment value allocation. In addition, after changing from special hold to normal hold, it changes to red hold. It may be configured so that it may not be used.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to the means 6, after displaying the specific display by the first aspect (for example, special hold), a change effect (for example, an action effect) for changing the display mode of the specific display is performed. A change effect execution means (for example, a change pattern shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the third embodiment) in which the accompanying hold notice effect can be executed is displayed as a hold display or an active display. The change effect executing means includes a portion that changes the display mode, and after displaying the specific display by the first mode as the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the second mode (for example, blue hold) having a high advantage. It is possible to execute the effect of changing to (or red hold) (for example, change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and (E) and change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to 41 (I)). (It is possible to execute the original hold notice effect), and as a change effect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed by the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed. It is possible to execute the effect of changing to the third aspect (for example, normal hold) (for example, hold notice based on the change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40 (C) and the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F)). The specific display displayed by the third aspect is less advantageous than the specific display displayed by the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, from special hold to normal hold). When it changes (in the case of normal hold (via special hold)), the rate of super reach jackpot and super reach loss is lower than that of blue hold and red hold, and the rate of non-reach loss is lower. It may be configured to be expensive). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following (means 9) to (means 21). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-154678, a warning is given to a player in order to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game during the ending period after the hit game state is completed. There was something to do. In addition, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-8184, there is also a device that calls attention to prevent immersiveness during a customer waiting demonstration state or a variable display. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the interest of the game may be lowered by calling attention to the prevention of excessive immersiveness. In view of this point, it is required to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately calling attention to the prevention of sinking.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state or the like) that is advantageous to the player. The pachinko / pachislot machine is provided with a pachinko / pachislot machine (for example, a production control microcomputer 90100 for displaying a slingshot prevention image 90131). It is possible to call attention to the prevention of squeezing (for example, displaying the squeezing prevention image 90131) at the time of the waiting demo state, etc.) and when the advantageous state ends (for example, the ending period, etc.). Attention regarding prevention of entanglement is executed in different modes depending on the game state and the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the customer waiting demo state, as shown in FIG. 55 (h), the effect display device 909 As shown in FIG. 53, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the bottom of the screen, and the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed small at the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 58 (b) during the ending period. In addition, the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably carry out a warning regarding prevention of sinking.

(Means 10) In the means 9, as a warning, the warning means displays a warning display regarding prevention of entanglement, which is partially common between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. It can be displayed on the means (for example, it is possible to display an immersive prevention image having the same content of the displayed characters on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period). The display period of the warning display for preventing entanglement is shorter when the advantageous state ends than when the non-gaming state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, after the big hit ends than when the customer waiting demo state ends. The display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter during the ending period of.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorating due to the excessive warning display when the advantageous state ends.

(Means 11) In the means 9, as the warning, the warning means displays a warning regarding prevention of entanglement in a mode that is partially common between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, the immersive prevention image having the same displayed character content can be displayed on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period). The display area of the warning display for preventing entanglement is smaller when the advantageous state ends than in the non-gaming state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (h) and 58 (b), the customer. The display area of the immersive prevention image is smaller during the ending period after the big hit than in the waiting demo state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the warning when the advantageous state ends.

(Means 12) In the means 9, as the warning, the warning means displays a warning regarding prevention of entanglement in a mode that is partially common between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. It can be displayed on the display means (for example, it is possible to display an immersive prevention image with the same content of the displayed characters on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period). , The warning display regarding the prevention of entanglement is displayed at a position more inconspicuous to the player when the advantageous state ends than in the non-game state (for example, FIG. 55 (h), FIG. 58). As shown in (b), the immersive prevention image is displayed in the corner of the screen, which is less noticeable to the player, in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorated by excessively displaying the warning when the advantageous state ends.

(Means 13) In any of means 9 to 12,
As a warning, the warning means can display a warning display related to prevention of immersiveness in the same display period as other warning displays, and display each warning display at a different display start timing (for example,). As shown in FIG. 55, the entanglement prevention image 90131 can be displayed in the same period as the other warning display 90130, and the display timing of each warning display is different, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once.

(Means 14) In the means 12, the warning means can display a warning display related to prevention of immersiveness in the same display period as other warning displays as a warning, and each warning display fades in in order. (For example, as shown in FIG. 55, the entanglement prevention image 90131 can be displayed in the same period as the other warning display 90130, and the other warning display 90130 is faded in. After that, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is faded in, and after all the entanglement prevention images 90131 and the other warning display 90130 are available, they are faded out at a common timing, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

(Means 15) In any one of the means 9 to the means 14, a display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of types of display means). An effect control microcomputer 90100 or the like that displays an item corresponding to a musical piece, and a selection effect means (as shown in FIG. 59) that can execute a selection effect that selects one of the plurality of items. An effect control microcomputer 90100 or the like that changes the item selected by the method, and an effect execution means (as shown in FIG. 59) that can execute an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means. The display means is provided with a production control microcomputer 90100 or the like that outputs music or video corresponding to the above, and the display means executes the first production of the plurality of types of production in the selection production. Even in the state, the item corresponding to the first effect can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is executed, the music A is displayed. The corresponding item can be displayed by "returning", etc.), and the effect executing means selects an item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect while the first effect is being executed. In that case, the second effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is played from the beginning. Etc.), when the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again while the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over and executed (for example,). As shown in FIG. 59 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game even when the selected effect is selected again.

(Means 16) In means 15, at least the selection effect can be executed during the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the selection effect for selecting an item is executed during the jackpot state. It is possible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in the advantageous state even when the selected effect is selected again.

(Means 17) In the means 16, the selection effect is executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the player at the start of the jackpot. The selection effect at the start of the round, etc., which is executed regardless of the operation of, and the second selection effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (d)), which is executed based on the operation of the player after the first selection effect. 3) Includes selection effects, etc. that are executed based on the player's operation at the start of the third round.

According to such a configuration, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the advantageous state, the selection effect can be executed according to the preference of the player.

(Means 18) In means 17,
The period during which the second selection effect can be executed is longer than that of the first selection effect (as shown in FIG. 59, the first selection effect at the start of the round is from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. The second selection effect at the start of the 3rd round is set from the start of the 3rd round to the final round, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to deal with various types of players by prolonging the executable period of the second selection effect to be executed based on the player's operation.

(Means 19) In the means 17 or the means 18, the effect executing means can reproduce a musical piece as the plurality of types of effects (as shown in FIG. 59, the musical piece can be reproduced, etc.), and the first. In the selection effect, when an item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the item (for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), a round. In the selection effect at the start, when the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item, etc.), and in the second selection effect, the player Even if the item is changed based on the operation, the music to be played is not changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (e) and 59 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the player Even if the item is changed based on the operation of, the music to be played does not change, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 20) In any one of means 17 to 19, the display means is executing the first selection effect to display items corresponding to the currently being executed in the second selection effect. It is displayed in a mode different from the display of the item at the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed song is started in the round. Display with "Back", which is different from the display of "A" in the time selection effect).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to show the player in an easy-to-understand manner which effect is currently being executed.

(Means 21) In any of the means 17 to the means 20, with a hold storage means (for example, RAM 9055 of the game control microcomputer 90560) for storing information related to the variation display as hold information (for example, hold storage or the like). , A determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560 or the like) capable of determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled after the execution of the variation display corresponding to the hold information before the execution of the variation display corresponding to the hold information. ), And in the advantageous state, when the hold information determined to be controlled in the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the hold information is controlled to the advantageous state. Further provided with a notification effect means (for example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) for notifying in advance that the notification effect means, the notification effect means is in the advantageous state. The notification effect can be executed at any of the plurality of timings (for example, the hold continuous effect can be executed at any of the plurality of timings during the round), and one of the plurality of timings can be executed. As a result, the notification effect can be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items in the first selection effect (for example, the round starts as one of the plurality of timings). Hold continuous production can be executed at the timing when any of the multiple items at the time is selected).

According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised in the first-selection effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the second selection effect, the notification effect may be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a variable category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is a flowchart which shows the production process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice effect setting process such as hold. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the notice production decision table such as hold. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the action production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the afterglow effect decision table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the effect period of the afterglow effect when the hold notice effect is executed, and the period in which the hold display and the active display of the notice target are displayed depending on the display mode after change. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the effect period of the afterglow effect when the active notice effect is executed, and the period in which an active display is displayed depending on the display mode after change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the hold notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the hold notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the hold notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of the active notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display example at the time of displaying the hold display by the special suggestion mode in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a figure for demonstrating various displays during a customer waiting demonstration state and after a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating various displays in a customer waiting demo state and power saving mode. It is a figure which shows the screen in the customer waiting demo state. It is a figure which shows the screen during the menu operation. It is a figure which shows the screen in the power saving mode. It is a figure which shows the screen after the end of a big hit. It is a production drawing which shows the production which is executed during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the music selection process at the time of a big hit.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided in the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including (excluding board 6).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 3, a surplus ball receiving plate 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. The stick controller 122 is designated by a player holding the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pressing and pulling the stick controller 122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operating rod of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 125 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 121 or the like. 3) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

The member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation by a player, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the upper surface of the upper plate body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be moved to either the left or right side of the upper plate or the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship.

An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display device 9 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 in accordance with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the jackpot symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second symbol display area 9c for which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later. A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined display color (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized with each other. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized with each other. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. In addition, the passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 14 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 13 than the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 may be further narrowed, or the first start winning opening 13 may be further narrowed. By arranging the nails densely around 13 or making it difficult to guide the game ball to the 1st start winning opening 13 by arranging the nails around the 1st starting winning opening 13, the winning rate of the 2nd starting winning opening 14 It may be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13.

Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of valid winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 9a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 9b for displaying the second hold storage number. .. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, instead of the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is used. An area (total hold storage display unit) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) may be provided.

Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with an active display unit 9F, and the active display corresponding to the currently executing variable display is displayed on the active display unit 9F.

The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 9. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 forming a large winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 23.

On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 14) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the winning symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, an ordinary symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1. Furthermore, the probability variation state, which is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being judged as a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display of a special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state). Then, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased even in the time saving state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) in which the fluctuation time of the symbol is shortened although it is not the probabilistic state.

At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out opening 26 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 27 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 5 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 7 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 14. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation jackpot, the game state is shifted to the high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect). It shifts to a high base state which is a game state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display on the display device 9 can be easily satisfied (in this embodiment, it shifts to a time saving state). Also, when the gaming state is changed to the time saving state, it is also changed to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a starting prize.

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the state shifts to a normal symbol probability variation state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 10 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened increases. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability variation state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning is easy to win (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 10 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 15 increases, and the starting prize is easily won (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to the time saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol starts. It can be done more frequently (in other words, the reserved memory is digested faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, a valid start winning prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is performed increases.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 that controls the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built into the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 56 and a RAM 55 built-in, and the ROM 54 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 also includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 55 is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) will execute (or process) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is the time when the numerical data is read (extracted), it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value.

Further, an input driver circuit 58 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 that drives a solenoid 16 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560. It is mounted on 31.

Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol holding storage display 18b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 41 is performed.

An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the effect display device 9 that receives the effect control command and variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the sound output board 70. Controls the sound output of.

As will be described later, the effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 125 included in the stick controller 122, the tilt direction sensor unit 123, the vibrator motor 126, and the push sensor 124 included in the push button 120. However (see FIG. 3), the illustration is omitted in FIG.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 80 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by the power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 (not shown). The effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to control the display of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CG ROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit, which is a unidirectional circuit, may be further provided on the outside of the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 120 is detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. .. Further, the effect control CPU 101 vibrates the stick controller 122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

In the lamp driver board 35, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice or a sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs the sound to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and saved by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs game state restoration processing (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, the data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 may also transmit the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command. Good. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In this embodiment, the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been set timed out, a symbol confirmation specification command, which will be described later, is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

Instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power failure is restored, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that there is a power failure during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation is occurring during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside, and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set in the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 56 is an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process) for initializing the sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 sets the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random number R, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S16), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and it is displayed. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to determine. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number is one lap (normal symbol hit judgment random number taking). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, it executes a power supply stop time process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

Next, the CPU 56 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, the normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach". A variation pattern of reach PA1-2 is prepared. Of these, the non-reach PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that is not accompanied by reach and is not accompanied by pseudo-ream or sliding effect, and is a fluctuation pattern for normal fluctuation that is not shortened fluctuation (in this example, the fluctuation time is 12.50 seconds). Is. Further, the non-reach PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern that is not accompanied by reach and is not accompanied by pseudo-ream or sliding effect, and is a fluctuation pattern for shortening fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the normal fluctuation (variation time 2 in this example). .00 seconds).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the non-reach is out of reach, the case where the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream or the slip effect is not included is shown, but in the case of the non-reach out of reach. May be configured to provide a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-ream or a sliding effect.

Further, as fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "reach", normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2 and normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2, and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2. As shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-1 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-2 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation is to temporarily stop the effect symbol that is temporarily out of alignment from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then re-execute the variable display of the effect symbol. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the variable patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol are the normal PA2-3 to the normal PA2-4 and the normal PB2. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when a sudden probability change big hit or small hit occurs. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, among the fluctuation patterns used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and accompanied by the effect of a pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-3 is used, the re-variation is performed once. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when the normal PB2-4 is used, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of reaching and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream, when Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4 are used, the re-variation is performed three times. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3, which is used in the case of a sudden probability change big hit or a small hit and is accompanied by a pseudo-ream effect, is re-variated once.

7 (A) to 7 (C) are explanatory views showing fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C for big hits. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is set to a random number for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine one of a plurality of types based on the above.

The variable pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C for each jackpot are numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the random number values for determining the variable pattern type, and are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3. , A determination value corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of the special CA4-1 and the special CA4-2 is set.

For example, the variation pattern type determination table 132A for jackpot shown in FIG. 7 (A) used when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot" and FIG. 7 (B) used when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot". The allocation of the determination values for the variation pattern types of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3 is different from that of the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in the above.

As described above, when the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type are compared, the assignment of the determination value for each variation pattern type is different depending on the jackpot type. In addition, judgment values are assigned to different fluctuation pattern types according to the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used, and the ratios determined for the same variation pattern type can be different.

As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, in this embodiment, in the case of "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251. If so, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

In addition, regarding the super reach jackpot, a fluctuation pattern type with a pseudo-ream (a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and a fluctuation pattern type without a pseudo-ream (Super PB3-3, Super). It may be divided into the fluctuation pattern type) including the fluctuation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A for normal jackpot and the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B for probability variation jackpot, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and the super-reach and pseudo-ream are displayed. The fluctuation pattern type that does not accompany it will be assigned.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is "sudden probability variation jackpot", for example, when the jackpot type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than "sudden probability variation jackpot". Judgment value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type to which the judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "sudden probability change big hit" and the sudden probability change big hit state is controlled, it is different from the case of controlling to the normal big hit or the big hit state by the probability change big hit. It can be determined according to the fluctuation pattern type.

Further, FIG. 7D is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern type determination table 132D for small hits. The variation pattern type determination table 132D for small hits sets the variation pattern type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number for determination of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to to determine the random number. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7D, when it is decided to make a small hit, a special CA4-1 is determined as a fluctuation pattern type. ..

8 (A) to 8 (C) are explanatory views showing the deviation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C. Of these, FIG. 8 (A) shows the deviation pattern type determination table 135A used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. Further, FIG. 8B shows the deviation pattern type determination table 135B used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, FIG. 8C shows the deviation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In the deviation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, when it is determined that the variable display result is an deviation pattern, the variation pattern type is selected from any of a plurality of types based on the random number for determination of the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to to determine the random number.

In each of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B for deviation, numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type are shown, and are non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-2 and normal CA2. Judgment values corresponding to any of the fluctuation pattern types of -3 to normal CA2-4 and super CA2-5 are set.

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in this embodiment, when the game is out of alignment and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251. If this is the case, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in this embodiment, when the game is out of alignment and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 89. If so, regardless of the total number of reserved memories, at least the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation without reach (without the effect such as pseudo-ream or slip effect) is executed (variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-1). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10 described later, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 of the non-reach normal fluctuation). With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (variable pattern type determination table 135A, 135B for loss) is at least one of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (variable pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved storage number, second reserved storage number, total reserved storage number) stored by the reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer) for a part. It is configured so that a common determination value (1 to 89 in the examples shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B) is assigned. As shown in this embodiment, the "variable display pattern other than the variable display pattern for reach" means that, for example, the variable display result is not accompanied by the reach, and is not accompanied by the effect such as the pseudo-ream or the sliding effect. It is a variable display pattern (variable pattern) used when it does not become a big hit.

9 (A) and 9 (B) are explanatory views showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It is a table referred to for determining the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the random number for. The fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B for each are selected as the tables to be used according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is set to either normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with a random number value for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is "big hit". Includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to a certain case.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. The out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table 138A has a plurality of variation patterns based on random numbers for determination of variation patterns according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is "out of alignment". A table referenced to determine one of the types. The out-of-order variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as the table to be used according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 17) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and the type of big hit at the time of starting winning. , It is determined which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type falls within. In addition, it is possible to transmit an effect control command (a command for specifying a winning judgment result) indicating the content of the winning judgment result. The winning judgment result specification command includes an effect control command (symbol specification command) that indicates whether or not a big hit is made, whether or not a small hit is made, and a judgment result of the type of big hit among the winning judgment results. Among the winning judgment results, there is an effect control command (variation category command) that indicates a judgment result (judgment result of the fluctuation pattern type) as to which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type falls within. In this embodiment, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for specifying the type of the big hit is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and the control is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. I do. In addition, a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variable category command, and control is performed to transmit the effect to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and the type of the big hit, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 11, in this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made, and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designation command is transmitted.

For example, in the winning effect processing described later, when it is determined that the result is "missing", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that a "sudden probability change jackpot" occurs, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the result is a "small hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared between when the symbol specification command is set and when the display result specification command is set.

12 and 13 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, in this embodiment, which game state is used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol, and the random number for determining the variable pattern type at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that the value of is in the range of which determination value, and the variable category command is transmitted.

For example, when it is determined that the game state is normal and out of order at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 89. Judge whether or not. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 89 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which "05 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2-5 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the fluctuation pattern type is Super CA2-5 based on the reception of the fluctuation category 7 command.

The thresholds 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 used to determine which of the above fluctuation categories belong to are specifically for deviations shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. It is derived by picking up the values that can be the boundaries of the range of judgment values assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 8 to 9, 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 7 (A) to 7 (D) and FIG. 8 (C). The threshold value used for the category judgment is derived by picking up the value that can be the boundary of the range of the determined judgment values.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the game state is in a probabilistic state or a time saving state and is out of order at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not it becomes ~ 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-2), the CPU 56 sets "07 (H)" in the EXT data. Send a category 8 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets "08 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of Super CA2-5). Send a variable category 9 command.

Even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state, the fluctuation pattern type of Super CA2-5 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA2-5 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when the process of step S232 of the process of the winning effect, which will be described later, is executed, if it is out of order, a common determination process may be performed regardless of the game state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for the game state determination process in step S226.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "normal big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Is determined. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets "10 (H)" in the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets "11 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-2). The variable category 22 command is sent. Next, the CPU 56 sets "12 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3). The variable category 23 command is sent.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a "probability variation jackpot" is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Is determined. When the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets "13 (H)" in the EXT data as the fluctuation category. 24 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets "14 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variable category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets "15 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3). Send variable category 26 commands.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a sudden change in jackpot occurs at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. To judge. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1 is used), the CPU 56 sets "16 (H)" in the EXT data as the variation category. 27 Send a command. Next, the CPU 56 sets "17 (H)" in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when it becomes the variation pattern type of the special CA4-2). 28 Send a command.

Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variable category 29 command in which "18 (H)" is set in the EXT data.

It should be noted that the total number of pending memories is not always the same when the winning judgment is made at the start winning and when the variation display is actually started. Therefore, the variation indicated by the winning determination result specification command. It is possible that the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, at least for the fluctuation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3, a common determination value is assigned regardless of the total number of reserved storages. (See FIGS. 7 and 8), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a hold notice effect, which is a kind of look-ahead notice effect, is executed based on the winning determination result that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, or super CA3-3. To. Note that the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 (specifically, the variation category 1 command, are specified only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3. The variable category 7 command, the variable category 23 command, and the variable category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variable category command may not be transmitted in the case of a winning determination result of other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3 are not specified, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

The "look-ahead notice effect" is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the advance notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the execution of the hold notice effect, which is a kind of look-ahead notice effect, is determined when the start prize is generated, the hold display is displayed in the normal mode (in this example, the white circle display). A hold notice effect that is finally changed to a special display mode (in this example, a white triangle display, a rhombus display, or a star display) different from that of the special display mode is executed.

The mode of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and in addition to the hold notice effect, for example, as a look-ahead notice effect, a special display result such as a chance pattern symbol is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. Various modes such as executing an effect of stopping and displaying, performing an effect of counting down over a plurality of fluctuations, executing an effect of changing the effect mode in a manner of changing the background screen, and the like. Can be considered.

Further, in this embodiment, an active notice effect for changing the display mode of the active display displayed on the active display unit 9F is also executed in the same manner as changing the display mode of the hold display in the hold notice effect. In the active notice effect, the active display is finally changed to a special display mode (white triangle display, rhombus display, star display in this example) different from the normal mode (white circle display in this example). Let me.

14 and 15 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the large winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56 starts the first start winning opening 13 if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 13. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any of the processes of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total hold storage number). The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total reserved memory counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a background designation command (normal state background designation command, time saving state background designation command, probability change state background designation command) and a symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation). It also controls the transmission of commands (second symbol change specification command).

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command according to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S302 (2 in this example).

Display result specification command transmission process (step S302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S303 (3 in this example).

Special symbol changing process (step S303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 100. Controls the transmission of the specified command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

Special symbol stop processing (step S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process is displayed as a special symbol. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and in the display control process of step S22, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, while controlling the transmission of the large winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the large winning opening opening processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening pre-processing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the big winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S312 and S314. Of these, FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing the process of passing the first start port switch in step S312. Further, FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing the process of passing the second start port switch in step S314.

First, the process of passing the first start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (A). In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first (Whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the number of hold storage numbers is 4) is confirmed (step S1211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (formed in the RAM 55) (). Step S1214A). In the process of step S1214A, a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern are extracted and saved. Stored in the area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the game state is the time saving state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to step S1220A as it is. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1220A as it is.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the prize-winning effect process is executed in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the start prize (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218A), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

By executing the processes of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates a symbol each time the start prize is entered into the first start winning opening 13 and the winning effect process of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variable category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processes of steps S1218A to S1220A are executed, the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is generated and the winning effect processing of step S1217A is executed, the symbol is designated. A set of three commands, a command, a variable category command, and a first hold storage number addition designation command, is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

However, if the winning effect processing of step S1217A is not executed because it is determined to be Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 controls to transmit only the first hold storage number addition designation command in step S1220A. Is performed, and the control to send the winning judgment result specification command (design specification command, variable category command) is not performed. It should be noted that when the winning effect processing in step S1217A is not executed, the winning determination result is specified by setting a value (for example, "FF (H)") indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified as EXT data. You may send a command (design specification command, variable category command).

Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1215A is executed and there is a start prize in the first start winning opening 13, the prize in step S1217A is won only when the gaming state is the normal state. Time production processing is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S1216A is executed and there is a start prize in the first start winning opening 13, step S1217A is performed only when the game is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The production process at the time of winning is executed. It should be noted that the transition to step S1217A may be performed only in the case of the big hit game state, and the transition to step S1217A may be performed in the case of the small hit game state to execute the winning effect processing.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is controlled to open the jackpot for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot will start. We are in a state until it is notified that the opening of the big winning opening in the final round is finished and the big hit is finished. Specifically, the process from the pre-opening of the big winning opening (see step S305) to the big hit end process (see step S307) in the special symbol process process is being executed.

Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (B). In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the number of storages is 4) (step S1211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (formed in the RAM 55) (). Step S1214B). In the process of step S1214B, a random R (random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type which is a software random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern are extracted and saved. Stored in the area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. Good. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number in the variation pattern setting process described later.

Next, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (step S1218B), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

By executing the processes of steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always specifies a symbol every time the start winning is made to the second starting winning opening 14 and the winning effect processing of step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variable category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

Further, in this embodiment, when the processes of steps S1218B to S1220B are executed, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 is generated and the winning effect processing of step S1217B is executed, the symbol is designated. A set of three commands, a command, a variable category command, and a second hold storage number addition designation command, is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

In the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1215A is performed, and if the time is shortened (including the case where the time is controlled together with the probability change state), the winning effect process in step S1217B is executed. You may not do it. That is, the winning effect processing in step S1217B may be executed only in the normal state, and the symbol designation command and the variable category command may be transmitted. In this embodiment, as will be described later, since the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed only for the second reserved memory when the time is shortened, conversely, when the time is shortened, when the prize is won in step S1217B. The effect processing is executed and the symbol specification command and the variable category command are transmitted. In the normal state, the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217B is not executed and the symbol specification command and the variable category command are not transmitted. May be good.

Further, also in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S1217B may not be executed if the jackpot game is in progress. Further, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect processing in step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .. With such a configuration, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed for a certain period of time, it is possible to reliably prevent the look-ahead notice effect from being interrupted in the middle due to a short fluctuation time.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal big hit determination value, and confirms whether or not they match (step). S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern setting process. However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started. By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not a big hit or a small hit, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type are in the range of the judgment value. By doing so, the variation display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as will be described later, the effect control microcomputer is based on the judgment result at the time of winning. A hold notice effect or an active notice effect for announcing a big hit or a super reach during the variable display of the effect symbol by 100 is executed.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 is set with a probability change flag indicating that the game state is a high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the big hit determination value at the time of probability change, and confirms whether or not they match ( Step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variable displays will be executed between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 and whether or not the variable display is actually started until the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. Therefore, the gaming state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S221 or not and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the variation start). If a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before, it may change from the normal state to the probabilistic state.) Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

If the big hit judgment random number (random R) does not match the big hit judgment value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 uses the big hit judgment random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B and the small hit judgment value. And confirm whether they match (step S223). In this case, the CPU 56 is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) when there is a start prize in the first start prize opening 13 (when the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217A is executed). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. In addition, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the effect processing at the time of winning in step S1217B), the small hit determined in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is set. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value.

If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data "00 (H)" indicating that it is "missing" in the symbol designation command. (Step S224).

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state (specifically, whether or not the probabilistic change flag and the time saving flag are set). To judge. It should be noted that, from the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state, there are a plurality of times between the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, the game state changes between the time when the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the probabilistic state and whether or not it is in the time saving state, and the time when the variation display based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, if a probabilistic jackpot or a sudden probabilistic jackpot occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probabilistic state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the start winning and the gaming state determined at the start of the fluctuation do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a discrepancy, the one with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the judgment at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. May be good.

Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for disengagement according to the determination result in step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for determining the threshold value is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within the range of any determination value. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variable category command shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is determined.

For example, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 219 or less, and when the threshold value is 219 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 219). Determines to set "07 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). If the threshold value is not 219 or less (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that "08 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12).

Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 89 or less, and when the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 89). Determines to set "00 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). Further, when the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, when it is 90 to 99), it is determined that "01 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). Further, when the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, when it is 100 to 169), it is determined that "02 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). Further, when the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, when it is 170 to 199), it is determined that "03 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). Further, when the threshold value is 214 or less (that is, when it is 200 to 214), it is determined that "04 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). Further, when the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that "05 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12). Further, when the threshold value is not 229 or less (that is, when it is 230 to 251), it is determined that "06 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 12).

In the threshold value determination example shown above, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value, so that the one determined by the later threshold value is the previous one. It will never fall below the order threshold. That is, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 99 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, the value is not within the range of 1 to 89 below the threshold value in the previous order, and is 90 to 99. It will be determined whether or not it is within the range of. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in ascending order is shown, but conversely, 229, 214, 199, in order from the larger one. It may be determined as 169, 99 and 89. This also applies to the case where the determination using the other threshold values shown below is performed.

It should be noted that the threshold value in the normal state may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, the range of judgment values is common for at least the fluctuation pattern type that is "non-reach out" and the fluctuation pattern type that is "super reach out", so that "non-reach" is used. It is possible to determine whether or not the result is "off" or "out of super reach".

When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating that the "small hit" is a symbol designation command. Performs the process of setting to (step S227).

Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 shall set the threshold value 251 and, in step S232 described later, determines that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). , It is determined that "18 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data "18 (H)" is set as it is without performing the threshold value determination.

When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B ( Step S229). In this case, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a when there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217A). It is determined whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot". Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b is used to determine the jackpot type. It is determined whether the hit is "normal jackpot", "probability jackpot", or "sudden jackpot".

Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data according to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is obtained, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that the "normal big hit" is obtained in the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation jackpot" is obtained in the symbol designation command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability change big hit" is obtained, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that the "sudden probability change big hit" is to be set in the symbol designation command.

Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for the jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step S229 (step S231).

For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it determines that it is a "normal jackpot". In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 74 or less, and when the threshold value is 74 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 74). Determines to set "10 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13). Further, when the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, when it is 75 to 149), it is determined that "11 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13). Further, when the threshold value is not 149 or less (that is, when it is 150 to 251), it is determined that "12 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13).

Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the "probability variation jackpot" is determined, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 38 or less, and when the threshold value is 38 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 38). Determines to set "13 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13). Further, when the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, when it is 39 to 79), it is determined that "14 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13). Further, when the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, when it is 80 to 251), it is determined that "15 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13).

Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value of 100 when it determines that it is a “sudden probability change jackpot”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232, which will be described later, whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is the threshold value 100 or less, and when the threshold value is 100 or less (that is, when it is 1 to 100). Determines to set "16 (H)" as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13). Further, when the threshold value is not 100 or less (that is, when it is 101 to 251), it is determined that "17 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 13).

Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold values set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the variation pattern type determination random numbers extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B, and the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is in the range of any determination value. (Step S232).

In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 7 and 8) is set, and the variation pattern type set in step S232 is set. The determination table may be used to determine the range of values of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type is used.

Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 which variation pattern type it will be, and as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, "00 (H)" to "08 (H)", "10". A process of setting any value of "(H)" to "18 (H)" in the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

In this embodiment, even if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is obtained in the winning determination, the case where the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. If it is determined that the hit is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, a symbol designation command indicating that the winning is determined to be a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a variable category command comprehensively indicating that the variable pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. .. Then, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is not shown to be a specific variation pattern type, but is comprehensively shown to be one of the jackpot variation pattern types. Based on the receipt of the category command, the hold notice effect and the active notice effect described later may be executed.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). .. After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect control process process (step S705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S707). After that, the process proceeds to step S702.

19 to 21 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol) (step S614), the effect control The CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (effect control command indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type) (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 receives. The displayed display result specification command is stored in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (an effect control command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed) (step S619), the effect is produced. The control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

If the received effect control command is one of the symbol specification commands (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 first transmits the received symbol specification command to the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area of (step S622).

If the received effect control command is one of the variable category commands (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 transmits the received variable category command to each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of these, the latest symbol designation command is stored in the storage area (step S624).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number addition designation command (effect control command that specifies that the first hold memory number has increased by 1) (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 receives the first first. The hold storage number addition designation command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S626). However, when the game state is in the probability change state, the time saving state, the big hit game state, or the small hit game state, the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted, and only the first hold storage number addition designation command is transmitted. (Refer to steps S1215A to S1219A), in that case, the effect control CPU 101 sends the received first hold storage number addition designation command to the empty start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store in the first storage area.

Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the first hold storage display unit 9a according to the normal mode (white circle display in this example), and the first hold in the first hold storage display unit 9a. The storage number display is updated (step S627). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S628).

If the received effect control command is a second hold storage number addition designation command (effect control command that specifies that the second hold memory number has increased by 1) (step S629), the effect control CPU 101 has received the second effect control command. The hold storage number addition designation command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step S630).

Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the second hold storage display unit 9b in the normal mode (white circle display in this example), and the second hold in the second hold storage display unit 9b. The storage number display is updated (step S631). Further, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S632).

If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (effect control command that specifies that the first hold storage number has decreased by 1) (step S633), the effect control CPU 101 has the first hold storage. The hold display on the display unit 9a is erased one by one, the remaining hold displays are shifted one by one, and the first hold storage number display on the first hold storage display unit 9a is updated (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S635).

If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (effect control command that specifies that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1) (step S636), the effect control CPU 101 has the second hold storage. The hold display on the display unit 9b is erased one by one, the remaining hold display is shifted one by one, and the second hold storage number display on the second hold storage display unit 9b is updated (step S637). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S638).

If the received effect control command is a normal state background specification command (effect control command that specifies the background display when the game state is the normal state) (step S639), the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9. The background screen to be used is changed to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen having a blue display color) (step S640). Further, if the effect control CPU 101 is set, the time saving state flag indicating that the game state is the time saving state is reset (step S641).

If the received effect control command is a time-saving state background specification command (effect control command that specifies a background display when the game state is a time-saving state) (step S642), the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9. The background screen to be used is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a green display color) according to the time saving state (step S643). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the time saving state flag (step S644). If the effect control CPU 101 is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the probability change state flag indicating that the game state is the probability change state (step S645).

If the received effect control command is a probability change state background specification command (effect control command that specifies a background display when the game state is a probability change state) (step S646), the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9. The background screen to be displayed is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen having a red display color) according to the probability change state (step S647). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability change state flag (step S648).

If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (effect control command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started) (step S649), the effect control CPU 101 is the first symbol. The variable specification command reception flag is set (step S650). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (effect control command indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started) (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 is the second symbol. The variable specification command reception flag is set (step S652).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S653). For example, if the received effect control command is a jackpot start specification command (displaying a fanfare screen, that is, an effect control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game), set the jackpot start specification command reception flag and receive the effect control command. If is a jackpot end designation command (displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command that specifies the end of the jackpot game), the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a notice effect setting process such as hold for setting the presence / absence of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect and the change pattern (step S800A).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

Processing during effect symbol change (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Processing during the round (step S805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

Round post-processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a notice effect setting process (step S800A) such as hold. In the effect setting process such as hold, the effect control CPU 101 first receives a set of start winning commands (that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition designation). It is confirmed whether or not a new command or a set of the second hold storage number addition designation command) has been received (step S6001). Specifically, one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition designation command or second hold storage number addition designation command) are displayed in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a new command for starting a set of prizes has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S6002). If the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (that is, if it is the probability change state or the time reduction state), the process ends as it is.

If neither the probability change state flag nor the time reduction state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 newly receives the hold storage number addition designation command (new to the start winning command storage area). It is confirmed whether or not the hold storage number addition designation command) stored in is the first hold storage number addition designation command (step S6003). Unless the first hold storage number addition designation command is newly received (that is, when the second hold storage number addition designation command is newly received), the process is terminated as it is.

By executing the processes of steps S6002 and S6003, in this embodiment, only when a new start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 occurs while the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The processing after step S6004 is executed, and the hold notice effect and the active notice effect can be executed.

In addition, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, when a start winning prize is generated in the second starting winning opening 14 while being controlled to a probability change state or a time saving state, a hold notice effect or an active notice is given. The effect may be configured to be feasible.

Further, for example, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be variablely displayed in the order of winning the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the gaming state is the normal state. Hold notice effect or active notice regardless of whether it is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and regardless of whether the start prize is for the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. The effect may be configured to be executable.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more (step S6004). Whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more can be determined, for example, by checking the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635). .. If the number of first reserved storage is not 2 or more (that is, if the number of first reserved storage is 1), the process ends as it is.

In this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the display of the hold display is started in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to the special display mode at the timing of the hold shift. The fact that the number of first reserved memories is only one at the timing of the start winning is that when the hold shift of the first reserved storage is performed after that, the hold is immediately exhausted and the variable display is performed. There is no room to execute the hold notice effect. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is determined that the hold notice effect cannot be executed unless the first hold storage number is 2 or more in step S6004, and the process is terminated as it is.

Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, in the case where the hold display is immediately displayed in the special display mode at the timing of the start winning and the execution of the hold notice effect can be started, the first hold is performed. Even if the number of stored items is 1, the process may shift to the processing after step S6005 so that the hold notice effect can be executed.

Further, at least the active notice effect can be executed regardless of the number of first hold storages at the time of starting winning, so that the presence / absence and type of the active notice effect are determined even if the first hold memory number is 1. You may.

If the first hold storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence / absence and type of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect based on the latest received variable category command (step S6005). In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 selects a hold advance notice effect determination table for determining the presence / absence and type of the hold advance notice effect and the active advance notice effect based on the latest variable category command. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected hold notice effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect.

FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a notice effect determination table for holding or the like. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, in the hold notice effect determination table, there is no notice effect, hold notice effect A, hold notice effect B, hold notice effect C, active notice effect A, active notice effect B, A determination value is assigned to each of the active advance notice effect C and the active notice effect C.

As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect A is executed, the timing of the last hold shift after the display of the hold display of the notice target is started in the normal mode at the time of the start winning. The display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to a triangular display. Further, when the hold notice effect B is executed, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is diamond-shaped at the timing of the final hold shift after the display of the hold display of the notice target is started in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. Changes to the display. Further, when the hold notice effect C is executed, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed to a star at the timing of the final hold shift after the display of the hold display of the notice target is started in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. It changes to a shape display.

For example, if the first hold memory number is 2 at the time of the start prize, the hold shift timing is only once before the variable display of the notice target is started, so that the first hold after the start prize is held. At the timing of the shift, the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to a triangle display, a diamond display, or a star display. Further, for example, when the first hold storage number is 3 at the time of the start prize, the hold shift timing is twice before the start of the variable display of the advance notice, so that the first time after the start prize is given. At the timing of the hold shift, the hold display does not change in the normal mode, and at the timing of the second hold shift, the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to a triangle display, a diamond display, or a star display. Further, for example, when the first hold storage number is 4 at the time of the start prize, the hold shift timing is three times before the variable display of the advance notice is started, so that the first time after the start prize is given. At the timing of the second hold shift, the hold display does not change in the normal mode, and at the timing of the third hold shift, the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to a triangle display, a diamond display, or a star shape display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, when the active notice effect A is executed, the notice target changes after the display of the hold display of the notice target is started in the normal mode at the time of the start winning. In the display, the display mode of the active display changes to a triangular display. Further, when the active notice effect B is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a diamond-shaped display in the variable display of the notice target after the display of the hold display of the notice target is started by the normal mode at the time of starting winning. .. Further, when the active notice effect C is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a star-shaped display in the variable display of the notice target after the display of the hold display of the notice target is started in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. To do.

In this embodiment, the shape of the hold display or the active display changes, such as changing to a triangle display, a rhombus display, or a star shape display as the final display mode of the hold display or the active display. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the shape of the hold display or active display does not change, and the display color of the hold display or active display changes from a normal display color (for example, white) to a special display color (for example, blue or red). You may.

Further, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect or the active notice effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound is output when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes to the triangle display or the rhombus display, the effect sound α is output, and the display mode of the hold display or the active display is a star. When the shape display changes, the production sound β is output.

As an example of the effect sound α and the effect sound β, for example, a predetermined single sound may be output. For example, the single sound may be output only once as the effect sound α, and the single sound may be output twice in succession as the effect sound β.

Note that the example of the effect sound is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and for example, sounds such as "sankaku", "rhombus", and "hoshino" may be output from the speaker 27. .. Further, for example, when the display color of the hold display or the active display is configured to be changed, the speaker 27 may output a sound indicating the changed display color such as "blue" or "red". .. It suffices as long as it can suggest or recognize the pending display or active display after the change in some form.

Further, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the last hold shift, but the display mode is not limited to such a mode and is the last. The display mode of the hold display to be announced may be changed at the timing of the hold shift prior to the hold shift of. For example, when the first hold storage number at the time of starting prize is 3, the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed at the timing of the first hold shift, or the first hold storage number at the time of starting prize is 4. In some cases, the display mode of the hold display to be announced may be changed at the timing of the first or second hold shift. Further, for example, the timing for changing the display mode of the hold display of the notice target may be determined by the lottery process, and the display mode of the hold display of the notice target may be changeable at a plurality of types of change timings. ..

Further, in this embodiment, when the hold notice effect or the active notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed only once, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. It may be configured so that it can be changed a plurality of times. For example, after changing the hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to the triangle display, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target can be further changed to a diamond-shaped display or a star-shaped display at the timing of the subsequent hold shift. Good. Further, for example, after changing the hold display of the notice target from the normal mode to the triangle display, the active display may be further changed from the triangle display to the rhombus display or the star shape display in the variation display of the notice target.

Further, in this embodiment, not only the hold notice effect but also the active notice effect is determined based on the variable category command at the timing of the start winning, but the active notice effect is not limited to such a mode. May be configured to be determined at the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol. In this case, for example, the presence / absence and type of the active notice effect may be determined based on the display result specification command instead of the variable category command.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, a case where three types of hold notice effects A to C and three types of active notice effects A to C are configured to be executable is shown. Not limited to the mode, for example, four or more types of hold notice effect and active notice effect may be configured to be executable, and two types of hold notice effect and active notice effect may be configured to be executable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, when the variable category indicated by the variable category command is out of reach, out of super reach, or a super reach jackpot, a hold notice effect or an active notice effect can be executed. When the variable category indicated by the variable category command is another variable category, the effect control CPU 101 determines that neither the hold notice effect nor the active notice effect is executed as it is.

If the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates non-reach loss (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 12), the effect control CPU 101 gives a notice effect such as hold for non-reach loss shown in FIG. 24 (A). If the determination table is selected and the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates a super reach loss (variable category 7 shown in FIG. 12), a notice effect such as hold for the super reach loss shown in FIG. 24 (B) is produced. If the decision table is selected and the variable category indicated by the variable category command indicates a super reach jackpot (variable categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 13), the hold for the super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 24 (C), etc. Select the advance notice production decision table. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected hold notice effect determination table, and determines the presence / absence and type of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the execution rate of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect is higher than in the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. , When the hold notice effect or the active notice effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than when it is not executed. In addition, in the case of a super reach jackpot or a super reach loss, the execution rate of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect is higher than in the case of the non-reach loss, and the hold notice effect and the active notice effect are executed. In that case, the degree of expectation (reach reliability) for super reach is higher than in the case where it is not executed. Not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, for example, when the hold notice effect or the active notice effect is executed, the expectation for the probability change jackpot (probability change reliability) may be increased. Good.

As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, even when the same hold notice effect or active notice effect is executed, when the hold notice effect C or active notice effect C is executed (hold display or active). When the display mode of the display changes to a star-shaped display), the determination value is assigned so that the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the highest. Further, when the hold notice effect B or the active notice effect B is executed (when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes to the diamond-shaped display), the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) becomes the next highest. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Further, when the hold notice effect A or the active notice effect A is executed (when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes to the triangular display), the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is set to be the lowest. Judgment value is assigned to.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the case where the selection ratio of the hold notice effect and the selection ratio of the active notice effect are the same is shown, but the hold notice is not limited to such a mode. The selection ratio may be different between the production and the active notice production. In this case, for example, even if the final display mode is changed, the expectation may be higher when the active notice effect is executed than when the hold notice effect is executed. On the contrary, the expectation may be higher when the hold notice effect is executed than when the active notice effect is executed. Further, for example, when the final display mode changes to the triangular display, the case where the hold notice effect is executed has a higher degree of expectation than the case where the active notice effect is executed, but the final display mode is a rhombus display. When it changes, the hold notice effect and the active notice are set according to the type of final display mode, such as making the expectation higher when the active notice effect is executed than when the hold notice effect is executed. It is possible to make a difference between the production and the one with the higher expectation.

When it is decided to execute the hold notice effect or the active notice effect (Y in step S6006), the effect control CPU 101 holds the type of the hold notice effect or the active notice effect determined in step S6005 on hold for the notice target. In association with the storage, the information is stored in the hold notification effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM (step S6007). In this embodiment, the hold notice effect and the active notice effect are performed in parallel with the plurality of hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and the active display displayed on the active display unit 9F. It is feasible, and since a maximum of four hold displays can be displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a and one active display can be displayed on the active display unit 9F, notification effect setting information such as hold can be stored. Five storage areas are provided in the area, and the types of the hold notice effect and the active notice effect are stored in association with each hold storage and the currently changing active display.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 22. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays a display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S8001). When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, in step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 uses a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

In step S8001, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal big hit", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbols. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stop symbols. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit", the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off", a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, the combination of the effect symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

In step S8001, the effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the effect symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other. Determine the stop symbol of. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of a miss is called a missed symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of a probabilistic state (an odd number symbol in this embodiment) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it does not become a probabilistic state (an even number symbol in this embodiment) is a non-probable variation symbol. Also called.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 causes the active display unit 9F to display the active display in a display mode corresponding to the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b. (Step S8002).

In step S8002, if the variation display of the effect symbol is to be started in response to the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, it corresponds to the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a. The active display is displayed on the active display unit 9F in the display mode. In this case, if the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a is the hold display in the normal mode, the active display in the active display unit 9F has the same mode as the hold display in the normal mode (this). In the example, a white round display) is displayed. Further, if the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a is the hold display in the special display mode, the active display in the active display unit 9F has the same mode as the hold display in the special display mode (the active display in the same mode as the hold display in the special display mode. In this example, a white triangle display, a diamond display, and a star display) are displayed.

Further, if the variation display of the effect symbol is to be started in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the first hold display (hold in the normal mode) displayed on the second hold storage display unit 9b. The active display (active display in the same mode as the hold display in the normal mode) is displayed on the active display unit 9F in the display mode according to the display mode.

It should be noted that this is a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is started according to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, or the case where the variable display of the effect symbol is started according to the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. Specifically, which of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command is received (either the first symbol variation designation command reception flag or the second symbol variation designation command reception flag). Can be determined by confirming whether is set (see steps S650 and S652).

Further, in this embodiment, when the active display is displayed on the active display unit 9F in step S8002, immediately after that, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. , The first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b is erased (see steps S631 and S634). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a or the second hold storage display unit 9b is erased at the timing of the hold shift at the appearance of the hold shift, and the erase is erased. It seems that a new active display is displayed on the active display unit 9F by taking over the display mode of the held display.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the probability change state flag or the time reduction state flag is set (step S8003). If neither the probability change state flag nor the time reduction state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (that is, if it is in the normal state). Step S8004). If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (that is, when starting the variation display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to step S8005. That is, in this embodiment, as described above, when the gaming state is the normal state, the hold notice effect and the active notice effect are executed for the first hold memory. Therefore, in steps S8003 and S8004. By executing the process, only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game state is the normal state, the processes of steps S8004 to S8012 are executed, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the special display mode. It is configured so that the action effect and the afterglow effect can be executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a change timing of the hold display in the first hold storage (step S8005). Whether or not there is a change timing of the hold display is determined by, for example, the type of the hold notice effect is stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6007), and this time is the last. It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is a hold shift timing. If there is a change timing of the hold display (Y in step S8005), the process proceeds to step S8007.

If there is no change timing of the hold display (N in step S8005), the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the current variation display is the variation display of the execution target of the active notice effect (step). S8006). Whether or not the current variation display is the variation display of the execution target of the active advance notice effect is determined, for example, by associating the current variation display with the hold etc. advance notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6007). It can be determined by checking whether or not the type of is stored. If it is not a variable display of the execution target of the active notice effect (N in step S8006), the process proceeds to step S8013.

When there is a change timing of the hold display in the first hold memory (Y in step S8005), or when the change display this time is a change display of the execution target of the active notice effect (Y in step S8006). ), The effect control CPU 101 selects a table according to the final display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced as the action effect determination table for determining the type of the effect effect (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected action effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on random numbers to determine the type of effect effect (step S8008).

FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the action effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 27, determination values are assigned to each of the action effect A, the action effect B, and the action effect C in the action effect determination table. In this embodiment, there are three types of action effects A to C as the types of action effects, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, only two types of action effects are used. It may be configured or may be configured to use four or more types of action effects.

As shown in FIG. 27, in this embodiment, when the action effect A is executed, the determination value is set so that the rate at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target changes to the triangular display is high. Allocated. Further, when the action effect B is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified changes to the rhombus display at a high rate. Further, when the action effect C is executed, the determination value is assigned so that the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified changes to the star-shaped display at a high rate.

In this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced changes to the star-shaped display, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the highest, and when the display mode changes to the diamond-shaped display, the next Since the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is high and the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the lowest when the display changes to a triangle display, as a result, the action effect C is executed. The highest expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) is the highest when the hit is performed, the next highest expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) when the action effect B is executed, and the highest when the action effect A is executed. Expectations for big hits (big hit reliability) are low.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, there is a case where the determination ratio of the type of action effect is different depending on which display mode the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target changes to. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the determination ratio of the type of action effect according to the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display or active display of the notice target (for example, whether or not it is a big hit) and the variable category (for example, the presence or absence and type of reach). May be configured to be different.

Further, in this embodiment, when the action effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified is changed, but the display mode is not limited to such a mode, for example, hold. Even when the display mode of the display or the active display does not change, the action effect (so-called Gase action effect) may be configured to be feasible. Further, for example, conversely, even when the action effect is not executed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be notified may be changed, and various modes are conceivable.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a table according to the final display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced as the lingering effect determining table for determining the effect period of the lingering effect (step S8009). Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the selected afterglow effect determination table, and determines the effect period of the afterglow effect (step S8010).

The "afterglow effect" is an effect that is executed after the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced has changed, and the hold display after the change is covered by covering a part of the hold display or the active display after the change. It is an effect that is performed in a mode in which the active display is difficult to see. However, in this embodiment, even during the execution of the afterglow effect, the hold display and the active display after the change are not completely invisible, but at least a part of them can be visually recognized.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the afterglow effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 28, determination values are assigned to the effect period of 2.0 seconds and 5.0 seconds, respectively, in the afterglow effect determination table. In this embodiment, there are two types of lingering effect production periods, 2.0 seconds and 5.0 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the lingering effect production period. May be configured so that there are three or more types.

As shown in FIG. 28, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced changes to the triangular display, the ratio of the afterglow effect being executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds is high. Judgment values are assigned so that they are higher. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display or active display to be announced changes to a diamond-shaped display, the lingering effect is executed over a production period of 2.0 seconds and the lingering effect is performed over a production period of 5.0 seconds. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio is the same as when it is executed. In addition, when the display mode of the hold display or active display to be announced changes to a star-shaped display, a judgment value is assigned so that the ratio of the afterglow effect being executed over the effect period of 5.0 seconds is high. There is.

In this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced changes to the star-shaped display, the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the highest, and when the display mode changes to the diamond-shaped display, the next Since the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is high and the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is the lowest when the display changes to a triangle display, as a result, the lingering effect is 5. It can be said that the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher when the lingering effect is executed over the effect period of 0 seconds than when the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds.

Further, in this embodiment, the lingering effect may have a production period of 2.0 seconds or 5.0 seconds, regardless of the type of action effect executed before that, and a notice. Regardless of the final display mode of the hold display or the active display of the target, the effect mode of the afterglow effect is always the same (in this example, as will be described later, the effect of confetti is executed).

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, when the determination ratio of the effect period of the afterglow effect is different depending on which display mode the display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced changes to. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the production period of the lingering effect is determined according to the display result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display or the active display to be announced (for example, whether or not it is a big hit) and the variable category (for example, the presence or absence and type of reach). It may be configured so that the ratios are different.

Further, in this embodiment, when the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 5.0 seconds, the degree of expectation for the jackpot is higher than that when the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds. The case where the (big hit reliability) is configured to be high is shown, but not limited to such a mode, conversely, the case where the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds is the case where the afterglow is executed. The degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) may be higher than that when the effect is executed over the effect period of 5.0 seconds.

In this embodiment, the effect period of the afterglow effect is determined as described above, so that the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the advance notice is displayed depending on the display mode after the change. It is configured so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the ratio of. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect period of the afterglow effect when the hold notice effect is executed and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed depending on the display mode after the change. .. Of these, FIG. 29A shows a case where the afterglow effect is executed over an effect period of 2.0 seconds. Further, FIG. 29B shows a case where the afterglow effect is executed over an effect period of 5.0 seconds. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in which the hold display of the notice target changes and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the notice target executed after that are the same, and the production period of the afterglow effect is set. The case of 2.0 seconds and the case of 5.0 seconds are compared.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), when the lingering effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds, the effect period of the lingering effect itself is indicated by A = A1 (2.0 seconds). In addition, after finishing the afterglow effect, the hold display after the change is displayed until the change display ends and the hold shift is performed, and after that, the display mode of the hold display after the change is taken over and the active display changes to the next change. Since it is displayed until the end of the variable display of, the period during which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is represented by B = B11 as shown in FIG. 29 (A). To. Therefore, in FIG. 29 (A), the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the advance notice is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is represented by A1 / B11.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), when the afterglow effect is executed over an effect period of 5.0 seconds, the effect period of the afterglow effect itself is indicated by A = A2 (5.0 seconds). In addition, after finishing the afterglow effect, the hold display after the change is displayed until the change display ends and the hold shift is performed, and after that, the display mode of the hold display after the change is taken over and the active display changes to the next change. Since it is displayed until the end of the variable display of, the period during which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is represented by B = B21 as shown in FIG. 29 (B). To. Therefore, in FIG. 29B, the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the advance notice is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is represented by A2 / B21.

In FIG. 29, assuming that the fluctuation time of the variable display in which the hold display of the notice target changes and the fluctuation time of the variable display of the notice target executed thereafter are the same, the lingering effect shown in FIG. 29 (B) is produced. Since the production period A2 = 5.0 seconds is longer than the production period B11 of the lingering effect, the period B21 is larger than the period B11 when the production period A2 = 2.0 seconds of the lingering effect shown in FIG. 29 (A). It gets shorter. Therefore, when FIG. 29 (A) and FIG. 29 (B) are compared, the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is , (A1 / B11) <(A2 / B21). As described above, in this embodiment, when the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 5.0 seconds, the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds, as compared with the case where the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds. Since the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is high, the relationship is (A1 / B11) [low expectation] <(A2 / B21) [high expectation], and this implementation is carried out. In the form, the degree of expectation for a big hit (big hit reliability) as the value of the ratio A / B between the production period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed increases depending on the display mode after the change. Can be said to be high.

In addition, in FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B), to be exact, the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes at the timing of the start of the afterglow effect after the action effect is completed. The period during which the hold display or the active display to be notified is displayed according to the later display mode can also be regarded as the period of (A1 + B11) and (A2 + B21), respectively. However, even in such a case, the ratio A / (A + B) between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the hold display or the active display of the notice target is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is (A1). / (A1 + B11)) [Small expectation] <(A2 / (A2 + B21)) [Large expectation], and as the value of the ratio A / (A + B) increases, the expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) Can be said to be high.

Further, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the effect period of the afterglow effect when the active notice effect is executed and the period during which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change. Of these, FIG. 30A shows a case where the afterglow effect is executed over an effect period of 2.0 seconds. Further, FIG. 30B shows a case where the afterglow effect is executed over an effect period of 5.0 seconds. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 30, it is assumed that the variation time of the variation display in which the active notice effect is executed is the same, and the case where the effect period of the afterglow effect is 2.0 seconds and the case where the effect period is 5.0 seconds are compared. doing.

As shown in FIG. 30A, when the lingering effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds, the effect period of the lingering effect itself is indicated by A = A1 (2.0 seconds). Further, after the afterglow effect is finished, the active display after the change is displayed until the variable display is finished. Therefore, the period during which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is shown in FIG. 30 (A). As shown, it is represented by B = B12. Therefore, in FIG. 30A, the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is represented by A1 / B12.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30B, when the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 5.0 seconds, the effect period of the afterglow effect itself is indicated by A = A2 (5.0 seconds). Further, after the afterglow effect is finished, the active display after the change is displayed until the variable display is finished. Therefore, the period during which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is shown in FIG. 30 (B). As shown, it is represented by B = B22. Therefore, in FIG. 30B, the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is represented by A2 / B22.

Assuming that the fluctuation time of the variation display in which the active notice effect is executed is the same in FIG. 30, the effect period of the lingering effect A2 = 5.0 seconds shown in FIG. 30B is the effect of the lingering effect. Since the period is long, the period B22 is shorter than the period B12 when the effect period A2 = 2.0 seconds of the afterglow effect shown in FIG. 30 (A). Therefore, when FIG. 30 (A) and FIG. 30 (B) are compared, the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period during which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is (A1 / B12). It is represented by the relationship of <(A2 / B22). As described above, in this embodiment, when the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 5.0 seconds, the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds, as compared with the case where the afterglow effect is executed over the effect period of 2.0 seconds. Since the expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is high, the relationship is (A1 / B12) [low expectation] <(A2 / B22) [high expectation], and this implementation is carried out. In the form, as the value of the ratio A / B between the effect period of the afterglow effect and the period in which the active display is displayed increases depending on the display mode after the change, the degree of expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) increases. I can say.

In addition, in FIGS. 30 (A) and 30 (B), to be exact, the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes at the timing of the start of the afterglow effect after the action effect is completed. The period during which the active display is displayed according to the later display mode can also be regarded as the period of (A1 + B12) and (A2 + B22), respectively. However, even in such a case, the ratio A / (A + B) between the production period of the afterglow effect and the period in which the active display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change is (A1 / (A1 + B12)) [ The relationship of [small expectation] <(A2 / (A2 + B22)) [high expectation] is established, and as the value of the ratio A / (A + B) increases, the expectation for big hit (big hit reliability) increases. I can say.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the effect period of the afterglow effect determined in step S8010 in the afterglow effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM (step S8011).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of action effect determined in step S8008 (step S8012). Then, the process proceeds to step S8014.

In this embodiment, since the hold notice effect and the active notice effect can be executed in parallel in a plurality of hold display and active display, the variable display which is the change timing of the display mode of the hold display. And the variable display that is the execution timing of the active notice effect may overlap. In this case, both the action effect and the afterglow effect may be executed on the hold display and the active display of the notice target (for example, the hold display and the active display of the notice target may be staggered in the variable display. In response to the above, the action effect and the afterglow effect are executed, respectively), and only one of the hold display or the active display to be announced may be selected to execute the action effect and the afterglow effect.

On the other hand, when the probability change state flag or the time saving state flag is set (Y in step S8003), when the first symbol change specification command reception flag is not set (N in step S8004), the change timing of the hold display and When neither is the flag nor the variation display of the execution target of the active notice effect (N in step S8006), the effect control CPU 101 is set to a normal process table (process without action effect) according to the variation pattern. Table) is selected (step S8013). Then, the process proceeds to step S8014.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8012 and S8013 (step S8014). Further, the effect control CPU 101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component 9) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and a speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8015). For example, the effect display device 9 outputs a command to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 27, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70.

In this embodiment, when the action effect is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol, step S8015 and step S8105 of the effect symbol variation process described later are executed according to the process table selected in step S8012. By doing so, the action effect is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 101 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8016).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the storage area of the start winning command storage area for starting winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and hold storage number addition designation command (first hold storage number addition). Of the specified command or the second reserved storage number addition specified command)), one of the commands at the time of starting prize stored in the first storage area is deleted, and the contents of the command storage area at the time of starting winning are shifted ( Step S8017).

Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8018).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S8101) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the action effect is being executed and the end timing of the action effect is reached (step S8106). Specifically, whether or not it is the end timing of the action effect can be determined by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8016. If it is the end timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start the execution of the afterglow effect (step S8107). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a lingering effect executing flag indicating that the lingering effect is being executed, and sets a lingering effect measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the lingering effect (step S8108). In step S8108, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the effect period of the lingering effect stored in the lingering effect setting information storage area (see step S8011), and 2.0 seconds is stored as the effect period of the lingering effect. If so, set a value equivalent to 2.0 seconds in the afterglow effect measurement timer, and if 5.0 seconds is stored as the effect period of the afterglow effect, set a value equivalent to 5.0 seconds in the afterglow effect measurement timer. set.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 changes the display mode of the hold display or active display to be announced to the final display mode (step S8109). In step S8109, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of the hold advance notice effect or the type of the active advance notice effect stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6007), and confirms the type of the hold advance notice effect or the active. Change to the final display mode according to the type of notice effect. For example, in the case of the hold notice effect A, the hold display of the notice target is changed to a triangular display, and in the case of the hold notice effect B, the hold display of the notice target is changed to a diamond-shaped display, which is the hold notice effect C. In that case, the hold display for the notice is changed to the star-shaped display. Further, for example, in the case of the active notice effect A, the active display is changed to a triangular display, in the case of the active notice effect B, the active display is changed to a rhombus display, and in the case of the active notice effect C, it is active. Change the display to a star-shaped display.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 controls to output the effect sound from the speaker 27 according to the final display mode of the hold display or the active display to be announced (step S8110). In step S8109, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the type of hold advance notice effect or the type of active advance notice effect stored in the hold advance notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6007), and confirms the type of hold advance notice effect or active. Control is performed to output a production sound according to the type of warning production. For example, in the case of the hold notice effect A, the hold notice effect B, the active notice effect A or the active notice effect B (that is, when the final display mode is the triangular display or the diamond display), the effect sound α is emitted from the speaker 27. Control the output. Further, for example, in the case of the hold notice effect C or the active notice effect C (that is, when the final display mode is the star-shaped display), the effect sound β is controlled to be output from the speaker 27 (see FIG. 24). ..

When the execution of the action effect is completed by executing the processes of steps S8106 to S8110, the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the notice target is changed, the execution of the afterglow effect is started, and the hold display of the notice target is started. Alternatively, an effect sound corresponding to the final display mode of the active display is output.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the lingering effect executing flag is set (step S8111). If the lingering effect executing flag is set (that is, if the lingering effect is being executed), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the lingering effect measurement timer (step S8112), and the lingering effect after the subtraction is performed. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the measurement timer is 0 (whether or not it has timed out) (step S8113). If the afterglow effect measurement timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to end the execution of the afterglow effect (step S8114). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the lingering effect executing flag (step S8115).

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S8116), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) (step S8117).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first erases the active display displayed on the active display unit 9F (step S8300). If there is a hold memory and the next fluctuation display is started immediately after the end of the current fluctuation display, the active display being displayed may be continuously displayed as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S8305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302).

Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 shifts to step S8311. To do.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S8305). Whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (big hit start designation command reception flag). It can be determined by checking whether or not the flag (small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received is set. If any of the jackpot start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 responds to the effect pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) by changing the value of the effect control process flag. Update to the value (step S8311).

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the hold notice effect will be described. 33 to 35 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect. Of these, FIG. 33 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect when the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is the triangular display. Further, FIG. 34 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect when the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is the diamond-shaped display. Further, FIG. 35 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect when the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is the star-shaped display. In addition, in FIGS. 33 to 35, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

First, with reference to FIG. 33, a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect when the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is the triangular display will be described. As shown in FIG. 33 (1), it is assumed that the variable display immediately before the variable display of the notice target is started, and the timing of the last hold shift of the hold display of the notice target is set. In this case, the type of action effect is determined and the effect period of the afterglow effect is determined based on the change timing of the hold display at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8008 and S8010).

Next, when the start timing of the action effect is reached during the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect display device 9 starts executing the action effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (2). In the example shown in FIG. 33 (2), the execution of the action effect B is determined as the type of the action effect, and as the action effect B, for example, an effect in which an image 200 of a yellow balloon appears is started. Cases are shown. In the example shown in FIG. 33 (2), the case where the action effect B is executed is shown as an example, but when the action effect A is determined as the type of the action effect, the execution of the action effect A starts. When the action effect C is determined as the type of the action effect, the execution of the action effect C is started. In this case, for example, when the action effect A is executed, an effect in which a blue balloon image appears, or when the action effect C is executed, an image of a red balloon appears. You may perform the production of various aspects.

In the example shown in FIG. 33, as shown in FIGS. 33 (2) to 33 (6), after the execution of the action effect is started, the effect symbol is displayed until the execution of the afterglow effect is finally completed. A case where the variable display is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 33 (3), the image 200 of the balloon is displayed on hold in the effect display device 9 as a notice target (in this example, the first hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a). ) Is performed. Then, at the end timing of the action effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (4), the effect display device 9 executes an effect in which the balloon bursts.

Further, when the action effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 33 (5), the execution of the afterglow effect is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S8107). In the example shown in FIG. 33 (5), as a lingering effect, an image 201 in which confetti dances from the bursting balloon is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (5), the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to the triangular display 202, which is the final display mode (see step S8109). As shown in FIG. 33 (5), even if the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to the triangular display 202, a part of the display mode is hidden in the image 201 in which the confetti dances, so that the game is played. From the point of view of the person, at this point, it is not possible to completely recognize whether or not the display mode of the pending display after the change is the triangular display (however, since a part of the display is visible, it is either the triangular display or the diamond display. Can be estimated). Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (5), an effect sound (in this example, the effect sound α) corresponding to the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is output (see step S8110).

Next, as the afterglow effect progresses and, as shown in FIG. 33 (6), the effect display device 9 displays a mode in which the confetti gradually falls downward, the hold display after the change gradually appears. It becomes visible, and it becomes recognizable that the final display mode of the hold display to be notified is the triangle display 202 (in this example, the downward triangle display as shown in FIG. 33 (6)). Then, when the effect period of the afterglow effect elapses, as shown in FIG. 33 (7), the execution of the afterglow effect is completed, and the hold display of the notice target after the change becomes completely visible in the effect display device. ..

If the effect period of the lingering effect is determined to be 2.0 seconds, the lingering effect shown in FIGS. 33 (5) and 33 (6) is executed for 2.0 seconds, and the effect period of the lingering effect is 5. When it is determined to be 0 seconds, the afterglow effect shown in FIGS. 33 (5) and 33 (6) is executed for 5.0 seconds. In this case, for example, the speed at which the confetti falls may be increased or decreased in the afterglow effect according to the length of the effect period. This also applies to FIGS. 34 and 35, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect when the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is the diamond-shaped display will be described. In FIG. 34, the effect modes shown in FIGS. 34 (1) to 34 (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 33 (1) to 33 (4).

When the action effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 34 (5), the execution of the afterglow effect is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S8107). In the example shown in FIG. 34 (5), as a lingering effect, an image 201 in which confetti dances from the bursting balloon is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (5), the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to the diamond-shaped display 203, which is the final display mode (see step S8109). As shown in FIG. 34 (5), even if the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to the diamond-shaped display 203, a part of the display mode is hidden in the image 201 in which the confetti dances. From the point of view of the person, at this point, it is not possible to completely recognize whether or not the display mode of the hold display after the change is the rhombus display. In particular, in this embodiment, at the stage shown in FIG. 34 (5), the afterglow effect is almost always started when the display mode of the hold display of the notice target shown in FIG. 33 (5) changes to the triangular display. Since the same effect mode is used, it is possible to recognize at least that the display has changed to either the triangle display or the rhombus display, but it is not possible to determine which of the triangle display and the rhombus display. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (5), an effect sound (in this example, the effect sound α) corresponding to the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is output (see step S8110).

Next, the afterglow effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 34 (6), as the effect display device 9 displays a mode in which the confetti gradually falls downward, the hold display after the change gradually appears. It becomes visible, and it becomes possible to recognize that the final display mode of the hold display to be notified is the diamond-shaped display 203. Then, when the effect period of the afterglow effect elapses, as shown in FIG. 34 (7), the execution of the afterglow effect is completed, and the hold display of the notice target after the change becomes completely visible in the effect display device. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a specific example of the effect mode of the hold notice effect when the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is the diamond-shaped display will be described. In FIG. 35, the effect modes shown in FIGS. 35 (1) to 35 (4) are the same as those in FIGS. 33 (1) to 33 (4).

When the action effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 35 (5), the execution of the afterglow effect is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S8107). In the example shown in FIG. 35 (5), as a lingering effect, an image 201 in which confetti dances from the bursting balloon is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (5), the display mode of the hold display to be announced changes to the star-shaped display 204, which is the final display mode (see step S8109). As shown in FIG. 35 (5), even if the display mode of the hold display to be notified changes to the star-shaped display 204, a part of the display mode is hidden in the image 201 in a mode in which confetti dances. It is not possible to see the entire hold display after the change. However, even if the entire hold display after the change cannot be visually recognized, if the display changes to the star-shaped display 204 as shown in FIG. 35 (5), it is shown in FIGS. 33 (5) and 34 (5). It is possible to recognize that the display mode of the hold display after the change is the star-shaped display 204, unlike the case where a part of the triangle display 202 or the diamond-shaped display 203 is hidden. Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (5), an effect sound (in this example, the effect sound β) corresponding to the final display mode of the hold display to be announced is output (see step S8110).

Next, the afterglow effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 35 (6), as the effect display device 9 displays a mode in which the confetti gradually falls downward, the hold display (star shape) after the change is made. The entire display 204) gradually becomes visible. Then, when the effect period of the afterglow effect elapses, as shown in FIG. 35 (7), the execution of the afterglow effect is completed, and the hold display of the notice target after the change becomes completely visible on the effect display device. ..

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the active notice effect will be described. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the active notice effect. Note that FIG. 36 shows, as an example, a specific example of the effect mode of the active notice effect when the final display mode of the active display is the triangular display. Regarding the effect mode of the active notice effect when the final display mode of the active display is the rhombus display or the star shape display, the rhombus display or the star shape display as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 is shown in FIG. 36. The explanation is given by applying it to the production mode of the advance notice production. Further, in FIG. 36, the modes of the effect screen change in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

As shown in FIG. 36 (1), it is assumed that the variable display of the notice target is started, the hold display of the notice target is shifted, and the display of the corresponding active display is started on the active display unit 9F. In this case, at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the type of the action effect is determined and the effect period of the afterglow effect is determined based on the variable display of the execution target of the active notice effect (see steps S8008 and S8010). ).

Next, when the start timing of the action effect is reached during the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect display device 9 starts executing the action effect, as shown in FIG. 36 (2). In the example shown in FIG. 36 (2), the execution of the action effect B is determined as the type of the action effect, and as the action effect B, for example, an effect in which an image 200 of a yellow balloon appears is started. Cases are shown. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (2), the case where the action effect B is executed is shown as an example, but when the action effect A is determined as the type of the action effect, the execution of the action effect A starts. When the action effect C is determined as the type of the action effect, the execution of the action effect C is started. In this case, for example, when the action effect A is executed, an effect in which a blue balloon image appears, or when the action effect C is executed, an image of a red balloon appears. You may perform the production of various aspects.

In the example shown in FIG. 36, as shown in FIGS. 36 (2) to 36 (6), after the execution of the action effect is started, the effect symbol is displayed until the execution of the afterglow effect is finally completed. A case where the variable display is reduced and displayed at the upper left end of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (3), the effect display device 9 executes an effect in which the image 200 of the balloon flies toward the active display displayed on the active display unit 9F. Then, at the end timing of the action effect, as shown in FIG. 36 (4), the effect display device 9 executes an effect in which the balloon bursts.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, in this embodiment, the image of the balloon is displayed when the hold notice effect is executed and when the action effect is executed, depending on whether the hold notice effect is executed or the active notice effect is executed. Although the destination of the 200 flying is different depending on whether it is on the hold display or the active display to be notified, the mode of the effect of the balloon image 200 flying is the same. Therefore, in this embodiment, the action effect, which is at least a part of the common effect mode, is executed depending on whether the hold advance notice effect is executed or the active advance notice effect is executed.

Further, when the action effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 36 (5), the execution of the afterglow effect is started on the effect display device 9 (see step S8107). In the example shown in FIG. 36 (5), as a lingering effect, an image 201 in which confetti dances from the bursting balloon is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (5), the display mode of the active display displayed on the active display unit 9F changes to the triangular display 205, which is the final display mode (see step S8109). As shown in FIG. 36 (5), even if the display mode of the active display changes to the triangular display 205, a part of the display mode is hidden in the image 201 in which the confetti dances, so that the player can see it. At this point, it is not possible to completely recognize whether or not the display mode of the active display after the change is the triangle display (however, since a part of the display mode is visible, it is up to whether the display mode is the triangle display or the diamond display. Can be estimated). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (5), an effect sound (in this example, the effect sound α) corresponding to the final display mode of the active display is output (see step S8110).

Next, the afterglow effect progresses, and as shown in FIG. 36 (6), the active display after the change gradually changes as the effect display device 9 displays a mode in which the confetti gradually falls downward. It becomes visible, and it becomes recognizable that the final display mode of the active display is the triangle display 205 (in this example, the downward triangle display as shown in FIG. 36 (6)). Then, when the effect period of the afterglow effect elapses, as shown in FIG. 36 (7), the execution of the afterglow effect is finished, and the active display after the change becomes completely visible in the effect display device.

If the effect period of the lingering effect is determined to be 2.0 seconds, the lingering effect shown in FIGS. 36 (5) and 36 (6) is executed for 2.0 seconds, and the effect period of the lingering effect is 5. When it is determined to be 0 seconds, the afterglow effect shown in FIGS. 36 (5) and 36 (6) is executed for 5.0 seconds. In this case, for example, the speed at which the confetti falls may be increased or decreased in the afterglow effect according to the length of the effect period.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, a case is shown in which a balloon having a different display color flies depending on the type of action effect, but the mode of the action effect is shown. Is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, as an action effect, an effect such as throwing a bomb or firing a cannon toward a hold display or an active display can be executed, or an action effect in which different characters appear depending on the type of action effect can be performed. You may do it. Further, for example, an action effect in which a bomb, a cannon, a character, etc. act on a hold display or an active display from different directions may be executed depending on the type of action effect, and various modes of action effect can be considered. Be done.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, a case is shown in which an effect in which confetti falls down is executed as a lingering effect, but an aspect of the confetti effect is shown in this embodiment. Not limited to confetti. For example, as a lingering effect, an effect in which at least a part of the pending display or the active display after the change is hidden by a smoke screen of a bomb or a cannon may be executed, and various lingering effects can be considered.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a specific display (hold display, active display in this example) corresponding to the variable display, and the display mode of the specific display is any one of a plurality of types. It is possible to suggest that the game is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit game state) by changing the display mode (in this example, a triangle display, a rhombus display, a star shape display). In addition, after changing the display mode of the specific display, the specific display is displayed in a mode accompanied by a post-change display (afterglow effect in this example) for a predetermined period (2.0 seconds or 5.0 seconds in this example). It can be displayed. Then, the specific display can be displayed so that it can be recognized which display mode the specific display has changed even in the state accompanied by the display after the change (in this example, FIGS. 33 (5) and 33 (6), As shown in FIGS. 34 (5), (6), 35 (5), (6), and 36 (5), (6), the pending display after the change is displayed even during the execution of the afterglow effect. Part of the active display is visible). Therefore, since the display mode after the change of the specific display can be recognized even during the display of the display after the change, the specific display can be focused on, and the effect of displaying the specific display can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, it is executed as a lingering effect as an example in which it is possible to recognize which display mode the specific display has changed even in a state accompanied by a post-change display (in this example, a lingering effect). It shows the case where at least a part of the shape of the hold display or the active display after the change can be visually recognized even in the state of being covered with confetti, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the hold display or active display changes to an unusual display color (for example, blue or red), the hold display or active display color after the change is lightly displayed in the confetti or smoke screen that is executed as a lingering effect. The display may be visible, as long as the display mode after the change can be recognized in some form.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to output sounds (in this example, the effect sound α and the effect sound β) corresponding to the display mode after the change of the specific display, and the display is accompanied by the change. However, it is possible to output a sound so that it is possible to recognize which display mode the specific display has changed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 24, when the final display mode is a triangular display or a diamond-shaped display, it is produced. Sound α is output, and when the final display mode is a star-shaped display, the effect sound β is output). Therefore, even while the display after the change is being displayed, the display mode after the change of the specific display can be recognized by the sound, so that the specific display can be focused on and the effect of displaying the specific display can be enhanced. ..

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, when the final display mode is the star-shaped display, it is possible to recognize that the star-shaped display is performed from the initial stage when the afterglow effect is started. On the other hand, when the final display mode is a triangle display or a rhombus display, it is not possible to distinguish between the triangle display and the rhombus display at the initial stage when the lingering effect is started, and the lingering effect progresses. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether it is a triangle display or a rhombus display according to the above. In addition, when the display changes to a recognizable star-shaped display at the initial stage of the afterglow effect, the star-shaped display is displayed at the initial stage depending on the sound by outputting the effect sound β different from other display modes. By making it possible to recognize that, and when it changes to a triangle display or a rhombus display, by outputting a common production sound α, it is immediately recognized whether the display is a triangle display or a rhombus display depending on the sound at the initial stage. It is configured so that it cannot be done. As such, in this embodiment, it is possible to configure so that there is a difference in the period until it becomes possible to recognize what kind of display mode the hold display or active display has changed depending on the type of final display mode. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying a specific display.

Further, according to this embodiment, an action effect (in this example, FIGS. 33 (2) to (4), FIGS. 34 (2) to (4), and FIG. 2) to (4) and the action effects as shown in FIGS. 36 (2) to (4) can be executed, and a plurality of types of action effects (in this example, the action effects A to C shown in FIGS. 27) can be executed. Is feasible. In addition, it is possible to display a common post-change display regardless of the type of action effect to be executed (in this example, FIGS. 33 (5), (6), and 34 (5) regardless of the type of action effect. , (6), FIGS. 35 (5), (6), and 36 (5), (6), the afterglow effect is executed in the common effect mode). Therefore, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect while suppressing an increase in the data capacity.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a common post-change display regardless of which display mode the specific display is changed to (in this example, the final of the hold display and the active display to be notified. Common to FIGS. 33 (5), (6), 34 (5), (6), 35 (5), (6), and 36 (5), (6) regardless of the display mode. Afterglow production is performed in the production mode). Therefore, it is possible to perform an easy-to-understand effect while suppressing an increase in the data capacity.

In this embodiment, the “common post-change display” refers to FIGS. 33 (5), (6), 34 (5), (6), 35 (5), (6), and FIG. As shown in 36 (5) and (6), it is shown that the effect display of the post-change display (in this example, the afterglow effect) is the same, and as shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, the post-change display is displayed. Shows the concept that the production period of is may be different, such as 2.0 seconds or 5.0 seconds.

Further, not limited to the embodiment shown in this embodiment, a plurality of types of afterglow effects may be made feasible. In this case, for example, the lingering effect to be executed from a plurality of types of lingering effects may be determined at different ratios depending on which final display mode the hold display or active display of the notice target changes, or the variable display of the notice target may be displayed. Depending on whether or not it is a big hit, the lingering effect to be executed may be determined from a plurality of types of lingering effects at different ratios.

Further, according to this embodiment, the degree of expectation differs depending on the ratio between the display period of the post-change display and the period in which the specific display is displayed depending on the display mode after the change (in this example, FIGS. 29 and 30 are shown). As described above, as the value of the ratio A / B between the production period of the lingering effect and the period during which the hold display or active display of the notice target is displayed increases depending on the display mode after the change, the degree of expectation for the jackpot (big hit reliability) Is high). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying a specific display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, by selecting the effect period of the afterglow effect at different ratios, as a result, the effect period of the afterglow effect and the display mode after the change are subject to the notice. The case where the degree of expectation differs depending on the ratio A / B to the period during which the hold display or the active display is displayed is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, after the afterglow effect, the period during which the hold display or the active display is displayed in the changed display mode is also determined from among a plurality of types of periods, so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the final ratio A / B. You may design a gaming machine. Further, for example, the effect period itself of the afterglow effect is fixed, and the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display is determined from a plurality of types of timings, and as a result, the final result is determined according to the difference in the change timing. The gaming machine may be designed so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the ratio A / B.

Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a lingering effect is executed when the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, but the mode is not limited to such a mode. For example, in this embodiment, when the display color of the dialogue display changes from white to red in the dialogue notice effect, or the display color of the telop display changes from white to red in the telop display during reach. The lingering effect as shown may be configured to be feasible, and at least a part of the changed dialogue display or telop display may be visible. Further, for example, when an effect of changing an image imitating a push button 120 into an image imitating a stick controller 122 is executed before a so-called decision effect (an effect of confirming that a big hit is achieved) It may be configured so that the afterglow effect as shown in the form can be executed, and at least a part of the image imitating the stick controller 122 after the change can be visually recognized. When executing an effect whose display mode changes in some form, not limited to the hold display and the active display, the configuration for executing the afterglow effect shown in this embodiment can be applied.

Embodiment 2.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display, the specific display corresponding to the variable display is at least a normal mode, a first specific mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode suggesting the content of the effect. The specific display means includes a specific display means capable of displaying in any of the display modes including the above, and an effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect. After displaying the specific display in the specific mode, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. It may be. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the second embodiment described below. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute the look-ahead advance notice effect. The look-ahead notice production is a production that targets fluctuations that have not yet started. Specifically, in the second embodiment, by executing the hold display change that changes the display mode of the hold display, the reliability of becoming a big hit in the variation corresponding to the hold display and the hold display can be obtained. It has a structure that can suggest the content of the production in the corresponding fluctuation.

Specifically, based on the random R (random number for jackpot judgment), the random number for jackpot type judgment, the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted at the time of the start winning, the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize is obtained. Whether or not it will be a big hit and which fluctuation pattern is used for the fluctuation is determined at a time before the fluctuation is started (for example, at the time of starting winning), and based on the determination result. It is configured so that the look-ahead effect can be executed. Hereinafter, the determination result when it is determined whether or not a big hit will be made at the time of starting a prize and which fluctuation pattern is used for the fluctuation may be referred to as a "winning judgment result". The winning determination result can be specified by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

Further, in the second embodiment, instead of the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9c shown in the first embodiment, one reserved storage display unit is used in the effect display device 9. Is displayed.

In the second embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold storage display unit, a normal display mode indicating the reliability of being a big hit and an effect suggestion display mode suggesting the execution of a predetermined effect. Is provided. The normal display mode includes "white" displayed in white and "red" displayed in red, and the reliability of being a big hit is gold> red> white. The effect suggestion display mode includes a special suggestion mode that suggests that the special zone effect is subject to advance notice by displaying the characters "special?". The special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected regardless of whether or not it is the target of the advance notice of the special zone effect.

The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one fluctuation or a plurality of continuous fluctuations. In addition, the more the number of executions of the special zone effect, the higher the reliability of the jackpot. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as "entering the special zone".

Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect that indicates that it is confirmed to enter the special zone after suggesting that it will enter the special zone (for example, an effect that displays "success!" After displaying "special zone chance!" ).

FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example in the case of displaying the hold display in the special suggestion mode in the second embodiment. First, (1) while the active display 151 and the two hold displays 152 and 153 are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display 154 corresponding to the hold memory is specially suggested. It is displayed in the mode (“special?”). At this time, it is decided to execute the special zone effect in which the reserved memory is the target of advance notice. At this time, the hold change pattern that changes from "white" to "red" is determined, and the first change timing (the timing at which the hold display for the change of the notice target is the first hold display) is determined. Let's say that.

Then, (3) the fluctuation ends at the deviation, and (4) the next fluctuation starts. At this time, the active display 151 corresponding to the new fluctuation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the rush notice effect is executed (image P is displayed). When 3 seconds have passed since then, (5) it is notified that the entry was successful (image P is switched and displayed), and the special zone is entered (image Q is displayed). At a timing 5 seconds after that, the display mode of the hold display 153 displayed in (6) special suggestion mode changes to "red". This is a misunderstanding that if the hold display 153 of the special suggestion mode is continuously displayed even after entering the special zone, there may be something related to the special zone. This is to change the display mode of the hold display that has finished its role (suggestion of entering a special zone) because it may be given to and confused.

As described above, in the second embodiment, at least, the specific display (in this example, the hold display and the active display) corresponding to the variable display, which is a gaming machine capable of executing the variable display, is displayed. A normal mode (“white” in this example), a first specific mode (“red” in this example), which has a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, “red”) suggesting the content of the effect. Specific display means that can be displayed in any display mode including (special suggestion mode) (in this example, "white", "red", or special suggestion in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the second embodiment. A portion capable of displaying the hold display in the embodiment (see FIG. 37)) and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific aspect (in this example, the second embodiment). In the effect control microcomputer 100 of the above, the specific display means includes a portion (see FIGS. 37 (5) and (6)) in which the special zone effect suggested by the special suggestion mode can be executed. After displaying the specific display in the specific mode, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the second embodiment is held in the special suggestion mode 5 seconds after the special zone effect is started, as shown in FIG. 37. Display 153 can be changed to "red"). This makes it possible to increase expectations for a specific aspect.

Further, the configuration shown in the second embodiment may be configured to be applied when the afterglow effect as shown in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, for example, even during the execution of the afterglow effect, at least a part of the hold display 154 of the special suggestion mode (“special?”) After the change may be visible.

Embodiment 3.
Further, a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, a specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and a display mode of the specific display after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect. The change effect executing means is provided with a change effect executing means capable of executing the change effect to be changed, and the change effect executing means displays the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, and then displays the specific display mode with a high degree of advantage. In addition to being able to execute an effect of changing to a mode, as a change effect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after displaying the specific display by the first mode, the display mode of the specific display can be changed. The effect of changing to the third aspect can be executed, and the specific display displayed by the third aspect may be changed to the second aspect at a lower rate than the specific display displayed by the first aspect. Specifically, it will be described with reference to the following third embodiment. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

In the third embodiment, when the execution of the hold notice effect, which is a kind of look-ahead notice effect, is determined when the start winning is generated, the hold display is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white circle display). A hold notice effect that is finally changed to a special display mode (in this example, a blue or red round display) is executed. In the third embodiment, when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the hold display is changed to the special display mode (in this example, the triangular display or the special display mode). The effect may be changed to (rectangular display) once, and the action effect may be executed at the timing of the subsequent hold shift to change the hold display to be announced to any special display mode. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as "normal hold", and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as "special hold". Further, the hold display displayed by the blue display color in the special display mode is also referred to as "blue hold", and the hold display displayed by the red display color is also referred to as "red hold".

For example, in the third embodiment, when the start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode using the final display mode determination table shown in FIGS. 38 and 39. Then, when a display mode other than "normal hold (without passing through special hold)" described later is determined as the final display mode, the effect control CPU 101 determines the latest winning determination result, the first hold storage number, and the final display mode. Based on this, the change pattern of the hold display to be notified is determined. Specifically, the change pattern is determined using the change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 40 and 41.

38 and 39 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the third embodiment, in the final display mode determination table, as the final display mode of the hold display, normal hold (without special hold) and normal hold (with special hold) are used. ), Blue hold, and red hold are assigned judgment values. Of these, "normal hold (via special hold)" means that after changing to special hold at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, it will finally be changed to normal hold at the timing of the subsequent hold shift. It is a return, and the final display mode itself is usually on hold, but the hold notice effect is executed. On the other hand, "normal hold (without going through special hold)" does not change to special hold at all, and does not change as normal hold until the hold is digested and the hold display is erased. It corresponds to the one that does not execute the production itself.

When the first hold storage number is 2, there is only one opportunity to change the hold display at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, so there is room to change the hold display to special hold once. Absent. Therefore, in the final display mode determination table for the first hold storage number "2" shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C), only for normal hold (without passing through special hold), blue hold, and red hold. , Judgment values are assigned to each, and there is no allocation of judgment values for normal hold (via special hold).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the third embodiment, when the winning determination result is out of reach, out of super reach or big hit of super reach, the hold notice effect can be executed. If the winning determination result is other than that, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the hold display as it is to "normal hold (without passing through special hold)" and executes the hold notice effect. Decide not to.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "2", the effect control CPU 101 is shown in FIG. 38 if the winning determination result indicates non-reach loss. If the final display mode determination table for 2 hold and non-reach loss shown in (A) is selected and the winning determination result indicates super reach loss, 2 hold and super shown in FIG. 38 (B). If the final display mode determination table for reach loss is selected and the judgment result at the time of winning indicates a super reach jackpot, the final display mode determination table for two hold and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 38 (C) is used. select. Further, in the effect control CPU 101, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3" or "4", the winning determination result indicates non-reach loss. If this is the case, the final display mode determination table for holding 3 to 4 pieces and non-reach loss shown in FIG. 39 (D) is selected, and if the winning determination result indicates super reach loss, FIG. 39 (E). ), And if the final display mode determination table for the super reach loss is selected and the winning judgment result indicates the super reach jackpot, the hold 3 to 4 shown in FIG. 39 (F). And the final display mode determination table for the super reach jackpot is selected. Then, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery process based on a random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this third embodiment, in the case of a super reach loss or a super reach jackpot, the final result is higher than the normal hold as compared with the case of a non-reach loss. The rate of change to blue hold or red hold is high. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the hold display finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the degree of expectation for super reach (reach trust) is higher than that of the case where the hold display is finally set to normal hold. Degree) is high.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the third embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the case is finally held normally as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to blue hold or red hold is higher than that. Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the third embodiment, in the case of a super reach jackpot, the blue color is finally held as compared with the case of non-reach loss or super reach loss. The rate of change to red hold is even higher than that. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the case where the hold display of the notice target finally changes to red hold has the highest expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability), and the case where it finally changes to blue hold. Next, the expectation for big hits (big hit reliability) is high, and the expectation for big hits (big hit reliability) is the lowest when the game is finally put on hold.

40 and 41 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table in the third embodiment. In FIGS. 40 and 41, the special Δ indicates the special hold of the triangular display, and the special □ indicates the special hold of the rectangular display.

When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the final display mode is blue holding, FIG. 40 (A). If the change pattern determination table for two hold and blue hold shown in FIG. 40 is selected and the final display mode determined is red hold, the change pattern determination table for two hold and red hold shown in FIG. 40 (B) is used. select.

Further, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "3", the effect control CPU 101 determines that the final display mode is normal holding (via special holding). If there is, the change pattern determination table for 3 holds and normal hold shown in FIG. 40 (C) is selected, and if the final display mode determined is blue hold, 3 holds and blue shown in FIG. 40 (D). The change pattern determination table for holding is selected, and if the determined final display mode is red holding, the three holdings and the change pattern determination table for red holding shown in FIG. 40 (E) are selected.

Further, when the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area is "4", the effect control CPU 101 determines that the final display mode is normal holding (via special holding). If there is, the change pattern determination table for 4 holds and normal hold shown in FIG. 41 (F) is selected, and if the final display mode determined is blue hold, 4 holds and blue shown in FIG. 41 (G). Select the change pattern determination table for hold. Further, if the determined final display mode is red hold, and if the winning determination result indicates non-reach loss or super reach loss, the four hold and non-reach loss / shown in FIG. 41 (H). If the change pattern determination table for the red hold is out of the super reach and the judgment result at the time of winning indicates the super reach jackpot, the four hold shown in FIG. 41 (I) and the super reach jackpot and the red hold are used. Select the change pattern determination table.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the third embodiment, when the first hold storage number is "4", the hold display to be notified is displayed as normal hold at the time of starting winning, and the first hold is held. It is configured to be changed to special hold at the timing of the shift, and can be changed to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold at the timing of the third and subsequent hold shifts. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the hold display to be announced is displayed at the fourth position (state after the start winning) and at the third position in the hold storage display unit. When is (the state after the first hold shift), the hold display to be announced does not change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to 40 (E), in the third embodiment, even when the first hold storage number is "3", the hold display to be notified is normally displayed at the time of starting winning. Since it is displayed as hold, when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the third position in the hold storage display section (the state after the start winning), the hold display of the notice target is changed from special hold to normal hold. It does not change to blue hold or red hold. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the hold display of the notice target is unlikely to change from the special hold to the normal hold during the period when the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth and third positions. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by changing the hold display of the notice target from the special hold to the normal hold at an early stage, and to prevent the effect of the hold notice effect from being lowered when the hold notice effect is executed. ..

Further, in the third embodiment, the action effect can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and even if the action effect is executed, the hold display to be notified changes as the special hold. It may not be available, or it may change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift from the special hold. Can be changed to normal hold. Further, for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift. The special hold does not change, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. As such, in this third embodiment, not only the case where one action effect returns from the special hold to the normal hold, but also the case where a plurality of action effects are executed and the special hold returns to the normal hold. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect when the hold notice effect is executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to 40 (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to 41 (I), in the third embodiment, the special hold of the triangle display and the special hold of the rectangular display are used as the special hold. There are two types, but when the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed, the ratio of the red hold being displayed as the final display mode is higher than the case where the special hold of the triangle display is displayed. It has become. On the contrary, when the special hold of the triangle display is displayed, the ratio of returning to the normal hold as the final display mode is higher than that of the case where the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), in the third embodiment, even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold, the red hold is finally displayed (that is, once the normal hold is set). There is a change pattern (change pattern 411,414) that makes the red hold appear to be revived and displayed after being discouraged when it returns, and this revival pattern change pattern 411 only when it becomes a super reach jackpot. , 414 are assigned judgment values so that they can be determined. Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the special hold is once returned to the normal hold and then finally becomes the red hold, the jackpot is confirmed, and the special hold is simply changed to the red hold. Expectations (reliability) for big hits are higher than in the case.

In addition, the effect control CPU 101 has an action effect (an effect that is executed in a mode that acts on the hold display and suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes) in the hold memory. When there is something, the action effect is executed. Whether or not the action effect can be executed is determined, for example, by checking the change pattern stored in the hold notice effect setting information storage area, and at the timing of the current fluctuation start (hold shift), special △ → special. △, special △ → normal hold, special △ → blue hold, special △ → red hold, special □ → special □, special □ → normal hold, special □ → blue hold, special □ → red hold It can be determined by confirming whether or not there is.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, the game machine capable of performing variable display and capable of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the specific display means). , A portion capable of displaying the hold display or the active display in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the third embodiment) and the specific display according to the first aspect (special hold in this example), and then the specific display. FIG. 40 in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the third embodiment of the change effect executing means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 of the third embodiment) capable of executing the change effect (in this example, the hold notice effect accompanied by the action effect) that changes the display mode of And a portion that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display in any of the change patterns shown in FIG. 41), the change effect executing means displays the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, and then the specific display is displayed. It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to a second mode (blue hold or red hold in this example) having a high degree of advantage (in this example, FIGS. 40 (D) and 40 (E) are shown. It is possible to execute the hold notice effect based on the change patterns 33 to 36 and the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to 41 (I)), and after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect as the change effect, When the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (normally held in this example) (in this example, FIG. 40). The hold notice effect based on the change patterns 31 and 32 shown in (C) and the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F) can be executed), and the specific display displayed by the third aspect is according to the first aspect. The rate of change to the second aspect is lower than that of the specific display displayed (in this example, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the change pattern that changes from special hold to normal hold and then to red hold is a change pattern. There are only change patterns 411 and 414 that can be selected only when the first hold memory number is 4 at the start winning and the super reach jackpot is hit, the allocation of judgment values is extremely small, and the change patterns 31, 32, which do not change with normal hold, The determination values are allocated more to 401 to 404. It may be the case that the red hold does not change after the change from the special hold to the normal hold.) As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

Further, according to the third embodiment, a game machine capable of performing variable display and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the third embodiment). The display mode of the specific display is changed after the specific display is displayed by the first mode (special hold in this example) and the hold display or the active display in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the form of. It is shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 in the effect control microcomputer 100 of the third embodiment (in this example, FIG. 40) that can execute the change effect (in this example, the hold notice effect accompanied by the action effect). A portion that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display in any of the change patterns), and the change effect executing means displays the specific display as the change effect after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect. It is possible to execute an effect of changing the mode to the second mode (blue hold or red hold in this example) having a high degree of advantage (in this example, the change patterns 33 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40 (D) and 40 (E)). And the hold notice effect based on the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to 41 (I) can be executed), and as the change effect, after displaying the specific display according to the first aspect, the specific display is displayed. When the mode is not changed to the second mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (normally held in this example) (shown in FIG. 40C in this example). The hold notice effect based on the change patterns 31 and 32 and the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIGS. 41 (F) can be executed), and the specific display displayed by the third aspect is the specific display displayed by the first aspect. In the case of changing from special hold to normal hold (in the case of normal hold (via special hold)) as shown in FIG. 39, the advantage is lower than that of blue hold or red hold. In comparison, the rate of super reach jackpots and super reach loss is low, and the rate of non-reach loss is high). As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

In the third embodiment, the special hold is displayed as the first aspect, the normal hold is displayed as the third aspect, and the case of changing from the special hold to the normal hold is shown. However, such a mode is shown. I can't be limited. For example, the normal hold is displayed in the position of the first mode, and the third mode is a completed hold indicating that the display mode of the hold display has been changed (for example, a round display including the character display of "done"). May be configured to display.

Further, when the configuration in which the hold display shown in the third embodiment changes from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, or the red hold is changed to the active display as shown in the first embodiment. It may be configured to apply. In this case, for example, the active display may be changed to the active display in the same mode as the special hold, and then changed to the active display in the normal mode, or changed to the active display in the blue or red display color. Good.

Further, the configuration shown in the third embodiment may be configured to be applied when the afterglow effect as shown in the first embodiment is executed. In this case, for example, even during the execution of the afterglow effect, at least a part of the special hold, the normal hold, the blue hold, and the red hold after the change may be visible.

Further, it is also possible to configure the gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first to third embodiments shown above. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the plurality of embodiments of the first embodiment to the third embodiment shown above may be appropriately combined, or the configurations shown in all the embodiments may be combined. A gaming machine may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the variation time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-ream (an effect in which one or more temporary stops and re-variations of symbols are executed during one variable display), etc. An example was shown in which one variation pattern command was transmitted when the variation was started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode, but the variation pattern was produced by two or more commands. The control microcomputer 100 may be notified. Specifically, when notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command as the first command, such as the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command is the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (after the second stop) may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform the effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. .. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the following: A second command may be sent (in the timer interrupt). The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, "different ratios" are not limited to those having different ratios due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratios are different (that is, one is 100% allocated and the other is 0%).

Further, in each of the above embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and ordinary symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the game machine, but in the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are used according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize, and a gaming medium such as a gaming ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving the prize are satisfied. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, there are probabilistic jackpots and normal jackpots as jackpot types, and based on the determination that the jackpot types are probabilistic jackpots, a gaming machine that is controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above embodiments to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not a big hit is achieved and the winning judgment (look-ahead judgment) of the variation pattern type, and a command (symbol designation) indicating the winning judgment result A case is shown in which a command (command, variable category command) is transmitted, and a hold notice effect or an active notice effect is executed based on a command indicating the winning determination result on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. Not limited to this, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for specifying only the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) or the variation pattern type determination random number extracted when the start winning is generated, and the effect control is performed. The microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (look-ahead determination) based on the value of a random number specified by those commands.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example). , Hold display, active display) is provided (for example, a part for executing steps S627, S631, S634, S637, S8002, S8300 in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the specific display executing means is provided. , It is possible to suggest that the display mode of the specific display is controlled to an advantageous state by changing the display mode to any one of a plurality of types (for example, triangular display, diamond-shaped display, star-shaped display) (for example, effect control). (Part of executing step S8109 in the microcomputer 100), after changing the display mode of the specific display, the post-change display (for example, afterglow effect) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 2.0 seconds or 5.0 seconds). The specific display can be displayed in the accompanying mode (for example, the portion where step S8107 is executed in the effect control microcomputer 100), and the specific display has changed to any display mode even in the state accompanied by the post-change display. The specific display can be displayed so as to be recognizable (for example, FIGS. 33 (5), (6), 34 (5), (6), 35 (5), (6), and 36 (5). ), (6), even during the execution of the afterglow effect, a part of the hold display and the active display after the change can be visually recognized), and further, it is possible to call attention to the prevention of immersiveness in the game. It is equipped with a warning means (for example, a microcomputer 90100 for effect control that displays a immersive prevention image 90131), and the warning means is at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer waiting demonstration state) and the advantageous state ends. When (for example, the ending period, etc.), it is possible to call attention to the prevention of entanglement (for example, display the entanglement prevention image 90131), and it differs between the non-gaming state and the end of the advantageous state. A warning about prevention of entanglement is executed depending on the mode (for example, in the customer waiting demo state, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 55 (h), and during the ending period. , As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen of the effect display device 909. The display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the game machine.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of displaying a specific display. In addition, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

It should be noted that the change in the display mode of the specific display may be associated with the execution of the alert regarding the prevention of immersiveness. For example, when executing a display change of the hold display as a change of the display mode of the specific display, if the player wants to be aware of a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness when the advantageous state (big hit) ends, be careful. It is also possible to limit the display change of the hold display when the arousal is being executed (for example, when the immersive prevention image is displayed). As a method of limiting the display change of the hold display, for example, the hold display is not changed during the period when the entanglement prevention image is displayed, and when the display of the entanglement prevention image is finished, or the advantageous state (big hit) is set. It is conceivable to execute the display change of the hold display when the next symbol change display is started after the end. In this way, the player's consciousness will be directed to the alert when the alert is being executed. Further, when the alert is being executed (for example, when the immersive prevention image is displayed), the display change of the hold display may be restricted without being restricted, and the display after the change may be restricted. Even in this case, the player's consciousness is directed toward alerting as compared with the case where the display after the change is not restricted.
In addition, if the player does not want to be aware of the alert regarding the prevention of immersiveness when the advantageous state (big hit) ends, the display change of the hold display and the display after the change are more conspicuous so that the alert is not noticeable. You may do so. As a method of making the display change or the display after the change of the hold display stand out, it is conceivable to display the display change or the display after the change of the hold display so as to be superimposed on the caution display. In this way, when there is a risk that the warning display will be excessively displayed when the advantageous state ends, it will be difficult for the player to be aware of the warning. Can be executed. If the timing of executing the display change or post-change display of the hold display accidentally overlaps with the execution period of the alert, the alert display is not displayed while the display change of the hold display or the post-change display is being performed. It may be displayed.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of displaying a specific display and appropriately performing a warning regarding prevention of entanglement, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, for example). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot state (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.), and for effect control that displays a warning means (for example, a sticking prevention image 90131) that can execute a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in a game. A microcomputer 90100, etc.) is provided, and the alerting means relates to prevention of sinking at least in a non-gaming state (for example, a customer waiting demonstration state, etc.) and when the advantageous state ends (for example, an ending period, etc.). It is possible to call attention (for example, display the immersive prevention image 90131), and execute the reminder regarding entanglement prevention in different modes depending on whether the non-gaming state or the advantageous state ends (for example). In the customer waiting demo state, the immersive prevention image 90131 is displayed large at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. 55 (h), and during the ending period, the effect display is displayed as shown in FIG. 58 (b). As shown in FIG. 53, the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen of the device 909. As shown in FIG. 53, the display period of the entanglement prevention image is longer in the ending period after the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state. (Short, etc.) Game machines can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 42 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front. FIG. 43 is a hit type table.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area 907 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906). In the pachinko gaming machine 901, a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area to play a game.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 904 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and is formed by the player. A stick controller 90122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. The stick controller 90122 is designated by a player holding the operating rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, the left hand) and pressing and pulling the stick controller 90122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 44) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation rod of the stick controller 90122, a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 44) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 90125 or the like. See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 44) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 44) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

On the member forming the ball striking plate (upper plate) 903, for example, the player presses a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 90122) to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 44) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 42, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be set to be closer to the left or right on the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch, a cross key switch, and a jog dial may be provided.

Near the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 as a display means capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, there is a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variable display of three decorative (effect) effect symbols, left, middle, and right, is formed.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may include only one special symbol indicator.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 908a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908b is used to display the effect. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013). Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variation display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the fact that the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and a concept including that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 909 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, enlarged / reduced or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. It is a display state, or a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps or sounds. This production is called reach production. Further, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color or the like) of a background image of the effect display device 909 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called the reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 9014 than in the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b consisting of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided, and a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The gaming machine is a hitting ball launching device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting ball operation handle 905 and launches the game ball into the gaming area 907 by using the rotational force of the driving motor. ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the first 1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the second 2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. , Hold display area, not shown). In the total hold storage display unit, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number of pending memories.) Is displayed. In this way, by providing the total hold storage display unit that displays the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. It is called a memory display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 9020 repeatedly continuously controls the open state and the closed state. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open is called a round. As a result, repetitive continuation control is also called round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is decided to make a jackpot, one of the jackpot types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 909, an ordinary symbol display 9010 for variablely displaying ordinary symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be lit by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

Further, an accessory 9012 is provided above the effect display device 909. The accessory 9012 is located between the game board 906 and the effect display device 909, and the position can be displaced by the accessory motor 9017. The accessory 9012 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to see, and moves to a position that is visible to the player when a predetermined effect is executed (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 909).

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

In the hit type table of FIG. 43, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot ( The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or It is closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

Of the "big hits", the probabilistic state is a state in which after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a higher probability that the special gaming state will be determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (normal gaming state that is not the probabilistic state). The type of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for a probability fluctuation state, also called a high probability state) is called a "probability variation jackpot". Further, in this embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. There is.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Further, among the "big hits", the type (type) of the big hits that is controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds and then controlled to the time saving state but does not shift to the probabilistic state is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special gaming state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened in association with the probability change state or the time saving state. It may be controlled to the electric chew support control state that facilitates the winning of the variable winning ball device 9015 (higher approach, higher frequency). Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control includes a control that shortens the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (the time from the start of fluctuation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) to derive and display the display result at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and a normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is high. Is increased, and it becomes easier for the game ball to start and win a prize (the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 are easily satisfied). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 9014 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a variable winning ball device 9015, that is, a control that facilitates winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning with the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used as terms indicating a combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The "low probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 43, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. The normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do. The probabilistic jackpot may not end until the condition that the next jackpot occurs is satisfied.

FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 44 also shows a payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 9057. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 built-in. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all of the RAM 9055 is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 90503.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. In addition, the output circuit 9059 that drives the solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variable display of ordinary symbols, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100, ROM 90102, RAM 90103, VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90 105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via a relay board 9077 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In addition to controlling the fluctuation display of the effect display device 909, the display of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side is controlled via the lamp driver board 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output board 9070. Performs various production controls such as controlling the sound output of. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the control according to the program stored in the ROM 90102 in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (or the effect control CPU 90101) executes the control (or the effect control CPU 90101). (Processing) specifically means that the effect control CPU 90101 executes the control according to the program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on the board other than the effect control board 9080.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 to the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 vibrates the stick controller 90122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the accessory motor 9017 via a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 9012.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 45, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R': A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R'is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or any type of probability variation jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2'(MR2'): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for determining a normal symbol hit). (6) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4').

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R'), the big hit type is one of these based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random'1). It is decided by the jackpot type of. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1'). Therefore, the random number 1'is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol.

Further, the variation pattern is first determined by using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2'), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3'). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is sometimes called a fluctuation type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-shortening state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 46 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change state) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

In the normal jackpot determination table, each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 46 (A) is set as a jackpot determination value, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, it is described in the right column of FIG. 46 (A). Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot judgment values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value) is set. .. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 46 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in (1) is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 46 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. 46 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when performed). FIG. 46 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the second hold memory) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed). This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (C) is used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1') of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 46 (B) and 46 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1'values match, and as the jackpot symbol, the jackpot symbol in which the random 1'values match. To determine. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when selecting the jackpot type from among a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (C) is used in FIG. 46. It may be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (C) may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 46 (B). .. By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the game control microcomputer 90560, as shown in FIG. 47, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 47 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating the variation pattern of the effect symbol to be variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols. The command 9000 (H) is a command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a command for designating the recovery of the power failure (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. The command 9F00 (H) is a command for designating the demonstration display of waiting for customers (specifying that the demo state is waiting for customers). After receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines that the player is not playing a game (customer waiting state) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and displays the demonstration screen. .. In addition, when the power failure is restored during the progress of the game such as during the variable display or the big hit game state, the power is restored in a state corresponding to the progress status of the game at the time of the power failure.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command designated after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a total hold storage number designation command indicating the total hold storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total hold storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the total hold storage number designation command is executed when the game ball starts winning the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when the start opening switch passing process described later is executed). , Is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Further, the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the start of the variation display (for example, when the special symbol variation display processing process described later is executed). The total hold storage specification command and the hold storage number subtraction specification command may also be used. For example, the total hold storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the hold storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that the production control microcomputer 90100 sends a command capable of specifying the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively, not as the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. The total value of and may be specified as the total number of pending storages.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the type of the jackpot, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. .. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

Next, a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (holding storage data) corresponding to the holding storage on the game control microcomputer 90560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 9055.

In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R'), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1'), which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination. Random numbers (random 2') and random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns (random 3') are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 9056 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 90503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014, these random values are extracted and stored in the second holding storage buffer.

The storage of information regarding the start winning prize as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The variation pattern type determination random number (random 2') and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') are not extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in advance in the storage area, but are described later in the variation pattern setting process. It may be extracted at (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

As will be described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer in this way is read at the start winning prize and used for the look-ahead notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

When there is a start prize to the first start prize opening 9013 or the second start prize opening 9014, it is called a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a total hold memory number designation command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start winning prize designation command, and total hold storage number designation command are stored. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured so that various commands such as the above can be stored in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the production display operation in the production and the like, or various production operations that do not involve the variable display of the production symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 90560 becoming high level. Is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid or not. , Step S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 901 and subsequent main processes are started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings (S901 to S905).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the clear switch is turned on (S906). If the clear switch is not turned on in S906, it is confirmed whether or not the data protection process of the backup RAM area (for example, the process when the power supply is stopped such as the addition of parity data) is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (S907). In this embodiment, when the power supply is stopped, a process for protecting the data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such a power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop has been saved. .. When it is confirmed that the power supply stop processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing.

Whether or not the power supply stop processing has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer saved in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing according to the execution of the power supply stop processing (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed.

If it is determined that the control state at the time of power supply stop is saved, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (S908).

In the power supply stop processing, the checksum is calculated by the same processing as the above processing, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In S908, the calculated checksum and the stored checksum are compared. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (process of S901 to S9013) executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time of recovery from the power supply stop, is executed. To do.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process (S9041 to S9042) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing). For example, in order to return to the state when the power supply is stopped, data such as a special symbol process flag backed up in the backup RAM, a flag indicating an abnormal state, and a flag indicating a game stop state are read. When the backed up various data are read out in this way, the game control of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started from the state when the power supply is stopped by using the data. Then, it shifts to S9014.

In S9014, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90503. Then, the CPU 9056 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (for example). S9015).

When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt disabled state (S9016), executes the initial value random number update process (S9018) and the display random number update process (S9018), and then again. The interrupt permission state is set (S9019). That is, the CPU 9056 is in the interrupt prohibited state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and is in the interrupt enable state when the execution of the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process is completed. To.

The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value such as a counter for generating a determination random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (determination random number generation counter). When the count value of the judgment random number generation counter goes around once, the initial value is set in the counter.

Further, the display random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display. In this embodiment, as the display random number, a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern for determining a fluctuation pattern of a special symbol or the like is used.

Further, when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is also set in the timer interrupt process described later in the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process. This is to avoid conflicting with the processing in the timer interrupt processing because it is executed (that is, the same processing is also executed in S9024 and S9025 of the timer interrupt processing). That is, if a timer interrupt occurs during the processing of S9017 and S9018 and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, the count value is counted. The continuity of is impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt prohibition state is set during the processing of S9017 and S9018.

In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically interrupted at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 49. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S9020). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their states are determined (switch processing: S9021). ..

Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). .. The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the large winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S90312). Then, depending on the internal state, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 9013. The first hold storage buffer to be stored, and the second hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 9014. Is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 9013a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting. Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "first" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "second" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed.

The processes of S90300 to S90307 are as follows. The special symbol normal processing (S90300) is a processing for determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and a determination of the big hit type when the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the random number for determining the variation pattern), and clocks the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S90304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305) is a process of controlling the opening of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 9020 according to the type of big hit. The processing during opening of the large winning opening (S90306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect during the big hit game state to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control and the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening. It is a process for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S90307). The jackpot end process (S90307) is a process of performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) is performed (S90701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in RAM 90103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (S90705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (SR1'-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1'-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol. A random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating ('-3, etc.) is executed (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, and each of them is cyclically updated within a predetermined range. It is used as a random number by extracting each at a predetermined timing.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S90707).

By executing such an effect control main process, in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect display device 909, various lamps, and the effect display device 909, and various lamps, according to the effect control command transmitted and received from the game control microcomputer 90560. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 9027L and 9027R, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 51. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and after executing the look-ahead effect process (S90700) for selecting the type of the look-ahead effect, the value of the effect control process flag. Any of the processes S90800 to S90807 is performed according to the above.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. Control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The pre-reading effect processing (S90700) is a process for determining pre-reading such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining the effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect is a change in the special symbol based on the hold information (holding memory information) before the turn of the display (symbol change) of the special symbol arrives. It is a production technique that determines the content of the display and gives a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. In the following, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process for confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S98001) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S90802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S90803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and controlling to derive and display the display result (final stop symbol) of the variation display.

The jackpot display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S90805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process. The round post-processing (S90806) is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 909 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is composed of process timer setting values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and controls to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

[Caution]
In this embodiment, various alerts are executed for the player. As a warning, a control is performed in which the pachinko gaming machine 901 is used to notify the player of various cautions regarding the game. For example, as a reminder, a notification is given to suppress excessive games. In this embodiment, images corresponding to various alerts are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909. It should be noted that such a warning may be executed not only by displaying an image but also by outputting a sound. Hereinafter, an example of a warning display displayed on the effect display device 909 as a warning will be specifically described.

[About the immersive prevention display]
As a warning display, there is a immersive prevention display as a display for preventing the player from being too enthusiastic about the game of the pachinko gaming machine 901 or the slot machine. In the anti-enthusiast display, for example, the words "Pachinko slot is a play that you can enjoy moderately. Be careful of the immersiveness." And the image that surrounds the characters are displayed. Further, the immersive prevention image is provided with an image surrounding the character and an image of a plurality of types having different display areas, although the content of the character is the same. With such a immersive prevention display, the player is restrained or warned from being enthusiastic about the game, and the player is restrained or warned from spending a large amount of money on the game.

[About the display to prevent forgetting to take]
As a warning display, forgetting to remove a prepaid card or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can identify the magnitude of the game value of a game ball or the like that can be used for the game. There is a forget-to-take prevention display as a prevention display. In the forget-to-take prevention display, for example, an image showing the ejection of the card is displayed together with the characters "Please be careful not to forget or steal the prepaid card." It should be noted that, instead of a card, a coin or the like as a game recording medium in which balance information or the like is recorded as information that can specify the magnitude of the game value such as a game ball that can be used for the game is targeted. You may perform an alert.

[About other warning displays]
Other warning signs are "Games under the age of 18 are prohibited by law", which prohibits games under the age of 18, and "Fraud is a crime." A warning display, a warning display to suppress fraudulent acts such as "Please be careful about fraud disguised as a strategy" are displayed with characters and images. The other warning indications may be other than those shown above. For example, when a movable accessory is provided on the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the movement of the movable accessory may be displayed. Therefore, care may be taken not to get injured.

[About display timing]
The above warning display is a menu for changing the production content during the customer waiting demo state, which is shifted when the game is not executed for a predetermined period, and during the ending period when the jackpot game state ends. It is displayed in each display period such as during the display period of the screen. The alert display is displayed in various display modes depending on the type of display and the display period. Such a warning display will be described below.

FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining various displays during the customer waiting demonstration state and after the end of the big hit. FIG. 53A is a diagram for explaining various displays including the immersive prevention display during the customer waiting demonstration state (hereinafter, also simply referred to as during the demonstration). Further, FIGS. 53 (b) and 53 (c) are diagrams for explaining various displays including a squeeze prevention display during the ending period after the end of the big hit. FIG. 53 (b) shows the display after the end of the first big hit, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the display after the end of the second and subsequent big hits when the big hits are continuous.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time elapses after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it is determined that the game is not being played, and the demonstration screen is displayed. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 side to the effect control microcomputer 90100 side when the start winning is not generated and there is no hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer. Will be done. The demo state ends with the start of a game such as the occurrence of a new start prize.

As shown in FIG. 53 (a), during the demonstration, three symbols (for example, three numerical symbols such as “375”), which are the final loss stop symbols, are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909. After being displayed for 15 seconds, a function introduction movie as a video introducing functions such as how to play and directing the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed for 39 seconds. After that, as a warning display, another warning display and a immersive prevention display are displayed for 6 seconds. The detailed display contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53A, when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is initialized, the display on the screen starts from the three symbol display which is the first screen in the demo state. On the other hand, if there is a power outage recovery during the customer waiting demonstration where the power supply is stopped and restarted due to a power outage, the production will not start from the 3 symbol display which is the first screen of the demo state, but other warnings The display on the screen starts from the timing when the display and the immersive prevention display are executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), the ending display is displayed during the ending period after the end of the first big hit. In the ending display, while the background image of the ending is displayed for 10 seconds, the mode display which is the information about the effect mode after the end of the big hit selected during the big hit is executed, and then the probability change number (time reduction) after the end of the big hit is executed. The probability variation number display (time reduction number display) indicating the number of times) is displayed. In addition, from 2 seconds before the end of the ending display, the prepaid card forgetting prevention display and the immersive prevention display are displayed together with the ending display. After that, along with the manufacturer logo display (also referred to as manufacturer information) indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the entanglement prevention display is displayed for 2 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (c), the ending display is displayed during the ending period after the end of the second and subsequent big hits. Here, the second and subsequent jackpots are jackpots when the jackpot is hit again during the 100 fluctuation display (during the probability variation state or the time saving state) after the end of the jackpot including the first jackpot. In such a continuous second and subsequent jackpots, as in the case of the first jackpot, the effect mode after the jackpot selected during the jackpot while the background image of the ending for 10 seconds is displayed as the ending display. The mode display, which is information about the above, and the probability variation number display (time reduction number display), which is information indicating the probability variation number (time reduction number) after the end of the big hit, are displayed. However, unlike the first big hit, from 2 seconds before the end of the ending display, the immersive prevention display is displayed together with the ending display, but the prepaid card forgetting prevention display is not displayed. After that, the entanglement prevention display is displayed for 2 seconds together with the maker logo display indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

As shown in FIG. 53, since the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state, an excessive warning display is performed when the big hit is finished. It is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being less enjoyable.

[About power saving mode]
Next, the power saving mode will be described. In this embodiment, when the customer waiting demonstration state continues for a predetermined time, a power saving mode is executed in which the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight of the effect display device 909 is suppressed to a low level to save power. The power saving mode shifts after a total of 60 seconds of demo state, which is 15 seconds for the three symbol display shown in FIG. 53, 39 seconds for the function introduction movie, and 6 seconds for the other warning display and the immersive prevention display, is executed three times. Will be done. That is, the power saving mode is entered 3 minutes after the customer waiting demo state is started. Further, the power saving mode ends on condition that the game is started. For example, the power saving mode ends when the game ball is driven into the game area 907. Further, the power saving mode is terminated by the player operating the push button 90120 or the stick controller 90122. When the handle is provided with a sensor, the power saving mode may be terminated by detecting the operation of the player by touching the sensor.

Such a power saving mode can be set to ON / OFF by a game clerk. As a method of setting the power saving mode, for example, a mechanical hard switch is provided on the effect control board 9080, and when the power is turned on while the hard switch is in a specific mode, the setting screen is displayed. Just do it. Here, the specific mode is a state in which the switch can be switched between items 0 to 9 and items A to F, and is installed in item F, for example. When the power is turned on while the product is installed in item F, a setting screen for whether or not the power saving mode is executed is displayed. After that, if the hard switch is set to any of 0 to 5, the player can adjust the volume (0 is the minimum sound, 5 is the maximum sound), and if it is set to any of 6 to B, the player can adjust the volume. The volume is fixed (6 is the lowest note, B is the highest note). The light intensity adjustment can be set in any state. If you only adjust the amount of light, you will not be able to adjust the volume even if you open the menu screen. When C to E are selected, it is in the same state as 0.

FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining various displays during the customer waiting demo state and the power saving mode. FIG. 54A shows various displays when shifting from the customer waiting demo state to the power saving mode. Further, FIG. 54B shows a display mode of the other warning display and the immersive prevention display, in particular, during the customer waiting demonstration state.

As shown in FIG. 54 (a), the power saving mode is entered after the demo state in which the demo state of waiting for customers is executed three times, which is a set of three symbol display, a function introduction movie, and other warning display and immersive prevention display. Will be done. In the power saving mode, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight of the effect display device 909 decreases, so that the screen becomes dark. Therefore, in the power saving mode, the function introduction movie is executed for 39 seconds after the three symbol display is executed for 15 seconds on the dark screen. However, in the power saving mode, the other warning display and the immersive prevention display are not displayed after the function introduction movie. During the power saving mode, after the function introduction movie, the display shifts to the three-symbol display again.

Then, when the power saving mode ends, the immersive prevention display on the first screen is displayed for 5 seconds. After that, if the variable display of the symbols due to the start winning is not started, the demo state starts from the 3 symbol display again.

Next, a display mode of the other warning display and the entanglement prevention display will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). Other warning signs include the above-mentioned warning signs prohibiting games under the age of 18. Here, for convenience of explanation, of the multiple types of other alert displays, the alert display that prohibits games under the age of 18 is alert A, the alert display for suppressing fraudulent activity is alert B, and fraud. The alert display for suppressing the action will be described as alert C.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the other warning display and the immersive display are displayed and erased within 6 seconds. Here, 1F (frame) is used as a display unit. In this embodiment, 1F corresponds to 1/30 second. First, among the plurality of other warning displays, the warning A fades in over the fade-in period of 15F (0.5S), and is displayed over the display period of 142F. After that, the alert A fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and is hidden over the non-display period of 14F.

After the non-display period on the 6th floor, the alert B fades in from the middle of the fade-in period on the alert A over the fade-in period on the 15th floor (0.5S), and is displayed over the display period on the 136th floor. After that, the alert B fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and is hidden over the non-display period of 14F.

After the non-display period on the 12th floor, the alert C fades in from the middle of the fade-in period of the alert A and the alert B over the fade-in period of 15F (0.5S), and is displayed over the display period of 130F. Will be done. After that, the alert C fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and is hidden over the non-display period of 14F.

The entanglement prevention display fades in over the fade-in period on the 10th floor after the fade-in period on the alert A, alert B, and alert C after the non-display period on the 35th floor, and is displayed over the display period on the 112th floor. To. After that, the entanglement prevention display fades out over the fade-out period of 9F (0.3S) and disappears over the non-display period of 14F. The fade-in period of the immersive prevention display is set shorter than that of other warning displays. In this way, the final entanglement prevention display can be made to appear earlier than other alerts, and the display can be sharpened.

As shown in FIG. 54 (b), the attention alert A, the attention alert B, the attention alert C, and the immersive prevention display are faded in in order, displayed in the overlapping period, and then faded out at the same timing. Is done. Although the fade-in period for preventing immersiveness does not overlap with the fade-in period for other alerts, it may be faded in so as to overlap.

In this way, the immersive prevention display and the other warning display can be displayed in the same period, and the display timing of each warning display can be different. According to this, when displaying a plurality of alerts in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once.

In addition, the immersive prevention display can be displayed in the same period as other caution displays, and after the other caution displays are faded in, the immersive prevention display is faded in, and the other caution displays and the immersive prevention display are displayed. After all of the above are available, fade out at the same timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

[Screen during customer waiting demo]
Next, various displays displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909 will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a screen during the customer waiting demonstration state. As shown in FIG. 55 (a), at the start of the customer waiting demonstration state, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 9091 to 9093 are displayed in a mode that results in a misaligned display at the center of the screen. Such a three-symbol display is displayed for 15 seconds. Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a function introduction movie as a video introducing functions such as how to play and directing the pachinko gaming machine 901 is displayed for 39 seconds.

Next, from FIG. 55 (c) to (f), three other warning displays 90130 fade in in order from the left. The other alert display 90130 is displayed on the upper center of the screen. After that, as shown in FIGS. 55 (g) and 55 (h), the sinking prevention image 90131 for preventing the sinking is faded in below the other warning display 90130. After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (i), the other warning display 90130 and the entanglement prevention image 90131 fade out at the same timing. Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (j), the screen is hidden for a predetermined period after fading out.

As shown in FIG. 55, the immersive prevention image 90131, which is a squeeze prevention display, can be displayed in the same period as the other squeeze display 90130, and the display timing of each squeeze display is different. Is performed. In this way, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the information regarding the plurality of warning displays.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the squeeze prevention image 90131, which is a squeeze prevention display, can be displayed in the same period as the other squeeze display 90130, and after the other squeeze display 90130 is faded in. , The entanglement prevention image 90131 is faded in, and after all the entanglement prevention images 90131 and the other caution display 90130 are aligned, the control is performed to fade out at a common timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

[Menu screen]
The menu screen is, for example, a display screen that presents various setting items that can be selected by the player in the effect display device 909 as icon images in the option format (menu format) during the customer waiting demo state. The menu screen has a hierarchical structure. If you select one item from the first screen where the main setting items can be displayed in a list format, detailed settings can be made for each selected item. For example, as the main setting items, it is possible to select a character corresponding to the effect when the game is executed, adjust the volume / light amount, and select the customized effect.

On the menu screen, items can be selected in the vertical and horizontal directions according to the tilt operation of the stick controller 90122 that can be operated in the front-back direction and the left-right direction, and it is selected when the push button 90120 is operated. It is decided on the item that was. To return to the previous screen, the push button 90120 may be operated in the "Back" item.

[Screen during menu operation]
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a screen during menu operation. By operating the push button 90120 from the screen in the customer waiting demo state shown in FIGS. 56 (a) and 56 (b), the menu screen 90132 of FIG. 56 (c) is displayed. Although a plurality of selectable items are displayed on the menu screen 90132, the drawings are omitted. An entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed below the menu screen 90132.

Here, the menu screen 90132 is composed of a hierarchical structure of a plurality of images. Then, the immersive prevention image is displayed at any layer of the menu screen 90132. The display mode of the entanglement prevention image may be different for each display layer of the menu screen 90132. In this way, it is possible to display the immersive prevention image in a mode corresponding to the content displayed on the menu screen 90132.

Further, in this embodiment, the display mode of the immersive prevention image differs depending on the effect state before and after the alerting is executed. Specifically, as an effect state before executing the attention alert by the entanglement prevention image, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is different depending on the difference of any character on the menu screen 90132. In addition, as will be described later, as the effect state after executing the attention alert by the immersive prevention image, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image at the ending is different depending on the difference in the mode during the probability change selected during the big hit game. There is.

When the item of character selection is determined by the operation of the stick controller 90122 and the push button 90120 on the menu screen in FIG. 56 (c), the screen of FIG. 56 (d) is displayed. Here, the default display mode of FIG. 56 (d) is a display mode in which none of the characters is set. As shown in FIG. 56 (d), a screen in which either character X or character Y can be selected as a plurality of types of characters is displayed. The immersive prevention image 90131 is also displayed on the character selection screen. The entanglement prevention image 90131 at this time is the same as the display mode of FIG. 56 (c). Further, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is the default display mode. It should be noted that the display mode of the entanglement prevention image in FIG. 56 (c) and the display mode of the entanglement prevention image in FIG. 56 (d) may be different from each other. The different display modes include, for example, those displayed at different positions, those displayed differently at different positions (those displayed in a reduced size compared to one), and the like.

It is assumed that after FIG. 56 (d), the player operates the push button 90120 and the character X is selected. After that, when the volume / light amount adjustment screen is selected from the various menus, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), the immersive prevention image 90133 is displayed below the volume / light amount adjustment icon. The entanglement prevention image 90133 of FIG. 56 (e) is displayed in a mode different from that of the entanglement prevention image 90131 shown in FIGS. 56 (c) and 56 (d). The volume and the amount of light are determined by operating the push button 90120 after selecting any of the small, medium, and large items by the left and right operation of the stick controller 90122.

Further, it is assumed that after FIG. 56 (d), the player operates the push button 90120 and the character Y is selected. After that, when the volume / light amount adjustment screen is selected from the various menus, the immersive prevention image 90134 is displayed below the volume / light amount adjustment icon as shown in FIG. 56 (f). The entanglement prevention image 90134 of FIG. 56 (f) is displayed in a mode different from the entanglement prevention image 90131 shown in FIGS. 56 (c) and 56 (d) and the entanglement prevention image 90133 shown in FIG. 56 (e). The volume and the amount of light are determined by operating the push button 90120 after selecting any of the small, medium, and large items by the left and right operation of the stick controller 90122.

Here, if none of the characters is selected and the default display mode is maintained, the default immersive prevention image 90131 as shown in FIGS. 56 (c) and 56 (d) is displayed as the volume / light amount adjustment icon. It will continue to be displayed below.

When the menu screen is closed by operating the stick controller 90122 and the push button 90120 from the states of FIGS. 56 (e) and 56 (f), the screen of FIG. 56 (g) is displayed. In FIG. 56 (g), the entanglement prevention image 90135 is displayed large in the center of the screen of the effect display device 909. In this way, based on ending the display of the menu screen 90132, the entanglement prevention image 90135 is controlled to be displayed first. After that, if the start winning is not generated, the screen in the customer waiting demo state shown in FIG. 56A is displayed. The immersive prevention image shown in FIG. 56 (g) may be different depending on the type of the selected character. Further, the display during the big hit game state may be different depending on the type of the character.

Here, if the immersive prevention display is not displayed on the menu screen, if the immersive prevention display is interrupted by opening the menu screen during the customer waiting demo state, the chance of seeing the immersive prevention display is reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to increase the chance of seeing the immersive prevention display by displaying the immersive prevention display in any of the layers of the menu screen. Further, at the end of the menu screen, a large entanglement prevention display is displayed in the center of the screen, so that the player can pay attention to the entanglement prevention display.

In addition, at the end of the menu screen, by controlling to display the immersive prevention display set at the end in the normal customer waiting demo state first, the immersive prevention display is displayed first at the end of the menu screen. You may try to do so.

In addition, a determination means for determining the selected character in the menu screen may be provided. The character information selected in the menu screen is stored in, for example, the RAM 90103, and based on the information, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control CPU 90101) determines the set character, and a warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness is displayed. The mode may be different.

Further, the mode of the warning display regarding the prevention of immersiveness may be different depending on the operation of the player, but the mode of the warning display regarding the prevention of immersiveness may be different depending on the effect state during the game. For example, the mode of the warning display regarding the prevention of immersiveness may be different depending on the fact that the lottery for transition to a specific effect state is won and the specific effect state is reached. More specifically, in a game in which the background changes due to a predetermined lottery or a predetermined number of games, the mode of warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness before and after the background change may be different.

[Screen in power saving mode]
Next, the screen in the power saving mode will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a screen in the power saving mode. After the three symbol displays shown in FIG. 57 (a) and the function introduction movie shown in FIG. 57 (b) are executed as the customer waiting demo state, the caution display 90130 and the immersive prevention image 90131 shown in FIG. 57 (c) are displayed. Is displayed. After the demo states shown in FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c) are executed three times, the mode shifts to the power saving mode shown in FIG. 57 (d).

In the power saving mode, the brightness of the screen decreases, but the effect during the customer waiting demonstration state continues. As shown in FIG. 57 (d), the function introduction movie shown in FIG. 57 (e) is executed after the three symbols are displayed in a state where the brightness of the screen is reduced. During the power saving mode, the warning display 90130 and the immersive prevention image 90131 are not displayed thereafter, and after the three symbol displays in the state where the brightness of the screen shown in FIG. The function introduction movie shown in FIG. 57 (g) is executed, and the following is repeated.

When the power saving mode is terminated by operating the push button 90120 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (g) during the power saving mode, the screen shifts to the screen shown in FIG. 57 (h). In FIG. 57 (h), the brightness of the screen returns to the original brightness, and the entanglement prevention image 90135 is displayed large in the center of the screen of the effect display device 909. After that, if no starting prize is generated, the screen in the customer waiting demo state shown in FIG. 57 (a) is displayed.

[Screen after big hit]
Next, the screen after the jackpot is completed will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a screen after the end of the big hit. FIG. 58A shows a screen during the jackpot game. During the jackpot game, a round game of 15 rounds is executed, and after the round game is completed, the ending image 90138 showing the background image of the ending is displayed over the ending period shown in FIG. 58 (b). The ending image 90138 is an ending image in which a character or the like (not shown) is displayed as a background. After the ending image 90138 fades in, the mode information fades in, and then the probability change number information (or time reduction number information) after the big hit fades in. The mode is provided with A mode and B mode, and it is possible to select which mode to use during the jackpot game. Depending on each mode, the effect executed in the probability change state or the time saving state executed after the end of the big hit differs.

During the ending period, in addition to the ending image, a prepaid card forget-to-take prevention image 90137 in which balance information is stored is displayed at an inconspicuous position in the lower left corner of the screen, and a dent prevention image 90136 is displayed below the prepaid card. In the ending period, after the ending image and the mode and probability variation number information are displayed, the forget-taking prevention image 90137 and the immersive prevention image 90136 are displayed. Details of the display of the image 90137 for preventing forgetting to take and the image 90136 for preventing entanglement will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (c) to 58 (f). The inconspicuous position is a position deviated from the center such as a position on the edge side of the center of the screen. Further, the content of the characters of the immersive prevention image 90136 during the ending period is the same as the content of the characters of the immersive prevention image 90131 in the customer waiting demo state.

As shown in FIG. 58 (c), during the ending period, the prepaid card forget-taking prevention image 90137 fades in before the entanglement prevention image 90136. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the entanglement prevention image 90136 fades in. Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the image 90137 for preventing forgetting to take and the image 90136 for preventing entanglement are displayed for a predetermined time. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 fade out at the same timing.

In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (f), the ending image 90138, the mode information, the probability variation number information (or the time reduction number information), the forget-taking prevention image 90137, and the immersive prevention image 90136 are faded in in this order, and these images are faded out. After that, the display of FIG. 58 (g) is displayed. In FIG. 58 (g), the manufacturer image 90139 as the manufacturer logo display indicating the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed below the manufacturer image 90139.

After such a first big hit, as shown in FIG. 58 (h), when the big hit display result is continuously obtained during the probability change state or the time saving state, during the big hit game shown in FIG. 58 (i). Be controlled. In the second consecutive jackpot, it is assumed that the B mode is selected during the jackpot game. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 58 (j), the ending image 90138 is displayed over the ending period. In the ending image 90138, an ending image (not shown) is displayed. Further, after the ending image 90138, the information of the B mode and the information of the probability change number of 100 times (time reduction number) are displayed. However, after the end of the second big hit game, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is not displayed as in the case after the end of the first big hit game, and only the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed small at the lower left of the screen. .. After the second and subsequent big hit games are completed, both the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the immersive prevention image 90136 may not be displayed.

Then, after the display of the ending image 90138 is erased, the display of FIG. 58 (k) is displayed. In FIG. 58 (k), the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the entanglement prevention image 90140 is displayed below the manufacturer image 90139. The entanglement prevention image 90140 is displayed in a mode different from that of the entanglement prevention image 90131 shown in FIG. 58 (g). Such a difference in the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is due to the type of mode selected by the player during the jackpot game. The entanglement prevention image 90131 of FIG. 58 (g) and the entanglement prevention image 90140 of FIG. 58 (k) may have a smaller display area than the entanglement prevention image 90131 displayed during the customer waiting demonstration state. ..

In addition, a determination means for determining the mode selected during the jackpot game may be provided. The mode information selected during the jackpot game is stored in, for example, the RAM 90103, and based on the information, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control CPU 90101) determines the set mode, and a warning display regarding prevention of immersiveness is displayed. The mode may be different.

As shown in FIG. 58, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display for entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the immersive prevention image 90137, and the display timing of the entanglement prevention image 90136 and the forgetting prevention image 90137 can be set. Control is performed to display different images. In this way, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the information regarding the plurality of warning displays.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display regarding the entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the forgetting prevention image 90137, and after the forgetting prevention image 90137 is faded in, the entanglement prevention image 90137 is inserted. A control is performed in which the prevention image 90136 is faded in, and after the forgotten prevention image 90137 and the indentation prevention image 90136 are all available, the prevention image 90136 is faded out at a common timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

After the ending image 90138 is displayed, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 may be continuously displayed until the manufacturer image 90139 is erased. In addition, when the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is continuously displayed, after the first big hit, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is displayed from the display of the ending image 90138 to the display of the manufacturer image 90139, but the second consecutive time. After the big hit, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is displayed while the ending image 90138 is displayed, but the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 may not be displayed when the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed. Further, the entanglement prevention image 90136 may be continuously displayed after the ending image 90138 is displayed until the manufacturer image 90139 is erased. When the entanglement prevention image is continuously displayed, the common entanglement prevention image may be continuously displayed even when the ending image 90138 is switched to the manufacturer image 90139.

Further, as for the various images displayed during the ending period, the next image may be displayed after the display of one image is completely completed. In addition, there may be cases where the timing at which the images fade in partially overlaps and cases where the images do not overlap. Further, the ending image 90138, the mode information, and the probability variation number information may be displayed at the same time, and then the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 may be faded in, and then the sinking prevention image 90136 may be faded in.

[Main effect]
Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55 (h), the entanglement prevention image 90131 is displayed in large size at the lower part of the screen of the effect display device 909 in the customer waiting demonstration state, and in the ending period, it is shown in FIG. 58 (b). As shown, the effect display device 909 is controlled to display the entanglement prevention image 90136 in a small size in the lower left corner of the screen. In this way, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered by executing a warning to prevent excessive immersiveness when the big hit is completed.

In this embodiment, the immersive prevention image having the same displayed character content can be displayed on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period. Then, as shown in FIG. 53, the display period of the entanglement prevention image is set to be shorter in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demo state. In this way, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorating due to the excessive warning display when the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (h) and 58 (b), the display area of the entanglement prevention image is smaller in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state. Is set to. In this way, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorating due to the excessive warning display when the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 (h) and 58 (b), the immersive prevention image is displayed to the player during the ending period after the end of the big hit than during the customer waiting demonstration state. Appears in unobtrusive corners of the screen. In this way, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display while preventing the game from being deteriorating due to the excessive warning display when the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display for entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the immersive prevention image 90137, and the entanglement prevention image 90136 and the immersive prevention image 90136. Control is performed so that the display timing is different from that of 90137. In this way, when displaying a plurality of warning displays in the same period, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to confirm the information by displaying the plurality of information at once. Therefore, the player can accurately recognize the information regarding the plurality of warning displays.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the entanglement prevention image 90136, which is a warning display for entanglement prevention, can be displayed in the same period as the forgetting prevention image 90137, and the forgetting prevention image 90137 is faded in. After that, the entanglement prevention image 90136 is faded in, and after the entanglement prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are all available, the control is performed to fade out at a common timing. In this way, it is possible to execute display control of a good-looking warning display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the entanglement prevention image 90131 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed over the period in which the ending image 90138 and the manufacturer image 90139 are displayed during the ending period. Will be done. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ending period from being extended by displaying all the information separately, and to appropriately execute a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness in a limited period after the jackpot game state ends. it can.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed after the mode information and the probability variation number information are displayed. In this way, by displaying the information about the game first, the player can pay attention to the display, and it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of immersiveness in the period after the jackpot game state ends. it can.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), a manufacturer image 90139 showing the manufacturer of the gaming machine is displayed after the ending image 90138, and a dent prevention image 90131 is displayed below the ending image 90138. In this way, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement while displaying the manufacturer information.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, the display of the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 ends in connection with fading in the entanglement prevention image 90136 after the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and switching to the manufacturer image 90139. However, the entanglement prevention image 90131 is continuously displayed until the display of the manufacturer image 90139 is completed. In this way, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

In this embodiment, when the big hits are continuous as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58 (j), the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is displayed only at the time of the first big hit, but the immersive prevention image 90136 is a big hit. Control is performed to display each time. According to this, it is possible to preferably execute the attention alert when the big hit game state is continuously controlled.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (e) and 56 (f), the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the difference of any character on the menu screen 90132. In this way, the attention can be appropriately executed by considering the relationship between the effect state before the attention is executed and the execution mode of the attention regarding the prevention of immersiveness.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 58 (k), the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the mode during the probability change during the big hit game. In this way, the attention can be appropriately executed by considering the relationship between the effect state after the attention is executed and the execution mode of the attention regarding the prevention of immersiveness.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the character and the mode set according to the operation of the stick controller 90122 and the push button 90120. In this way, it is possible to execute a suitable alert according to the preference of the player.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be different depending on the mode during the probability change selected during the jackpot game. In this way, it is possible to execute a suitable alert according to the preference of the player. In addition, as in the second embodiment described later, a music piece (a video corresponding to the music piece) may be selected during the big hit. In such a case, the display mode of the immersive prevention image may be different depending on the music (video corresponding to the music) selected during the big hit.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image may be different depending on the character set when the jackpot game state is controlled. In this way, it is possible to execute a suitable alert according to the preference of the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, the execution time until the immersive prevention image is displayed is controlled to be different between when the power failure is restored and when the initialization is performed. More specifically, during the customer waiting demonstration game, the time until the display of the immersive prevention image is started differs depending on whether the power failure is restored or initialized. In this way, it is possible to call attention to the prevention of sinking at an appropriate timing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the entanglement prevention image is controlled to be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the volume / light amount adjustment icon. In this way, it is possible to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the menu screen 90132 is configured by a hierarchical structure consisting of a plurality of images. Then, the entanglement prevention image is controlled so as to be displayed in any layer of the menu screen 90132. In this way, it is possible to suitably carry out a warning regarding prevention of entanglement.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 (g), the entanglement prevention image 90135 is controlled to be displayed first based on the end of the display of the menu screen 90132. In this way, the player does not overlook the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement, and the alert can be suitably executed according to the situation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54A and 57, when the brightness reduction image in which the screen brightness is reduced is displayed on the effect display device 909 during the power saving mode, the immersive prevention image is not displayed. Is controlled by. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the motivation to move from being significantly reduced during the power saving mode by preventing the immersive prevention image from being further displayed during the power saving mode.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (h), the entanglement prevention image 90135 is controlled to be displayed first based on the termination of the power saving mode. In this way, the player does not overlook the alert regarding the prevention of entanglement, and the alert can be suitably executed according to the situation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57B, the function introduction movie can be displayed on the effect display device 909 during the customer waiting demo state. Then, as shown in FIGS. 57 (e) and 57 (g), a function introduction movie other than the immersive prevention image can be displayed on the effect display device 909 in the power saving mode. In this way, it is possible to prevent the motivation to move from being significantly reduced during the power saving mode.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the processing during the jackpot effect in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the case where the music can be selected during the big hit will be described. In the second embodiment, a selection effect of selecting one of a plurality of songs from a plurality of songs is executed based on the operation of the player during the jackpot. In the second embodiment, when the stick controller 90122 or the push button 90120 is operated as the operating means, the movement of the player is detected by the sensor provided inside, and the detection signal is transmitted to the effect control board 9080. The effect based on the operation is executed. As the selection effect, one of a plurality of types of images may be selected during the jackpot, or one of the modes may be selected from a plurality of types of modes.

FIG. 59 is an effect drawing showing an effect executed during the jackpot. The production during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 59. As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the music selection screen is displayed at the start of the big hit. The music selection screen at the start of this big hit is displayed regardless of the operation of the player. In the area on the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 909, items corresponding to the songs A to D are displayed. The first selection image 90170 corresponding to the music A, the second selection image 90171 corresponding to the music B, the third selection image 90172 corresponding to the music C, and the fourth selection image 90173 corresponding to the music D are from above. They are displayed side by side in order. Further, around the first selected image 90170, it is indicated by a bordered display that an item corresponding to the image is selected.

The video area 90175 is displayed on the right side of the first-selected images 90170 to 90173. Images corresponding to the songs A to D flow in the image area 90175. At the start of the jackpot, with the first-selected image 90170 selected, a video corresponding to the music A flows in the video area 90175 from a specific unit (for example, a chorus portion where the music is heard). Further, at the start of the big hit, the music corresponding to the first selected music A is played from the specific portion (chorus portion). Here, the specific part may be a part other than the chorus part, which is the place where the music is heard. For example, it may be the main part of the music, which is the exciting part of the music but different from the chorus part. The video or sound corresponding to the music may be played from the beginning of the music.

Further, on the lower left side of the screen of the effect display device 909, a selection operation image 90176 that prompts a music selection operation imitating a stick controller is displayed. Further, in the center of the lower part of the screen, a decision image 90177 that prompts a music decision operation imitating a push button is displayed. Further, on the right side of the lower part of the screen, an image of "7" indicating which symbol the current jackpot is based on is displayed. In addition, the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper left side of the screen, and an image of a right-handed instruction prompting the player to play a game aiming at the area on the right side is displayed on the upper right side of the screen.

The state when the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 59 (a) and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). When the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 59 (a) and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a bordered state. Further, the video corresponding to the music B flows from the specific portion (chorus portion) to the video area 90175, and the music corresponding to the music B is reproduced from the specific portion (chorus portion).

The case where the music A is determined from the state of FIG. 59 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (c). When the music A is determined in the music selection at the start of the big hit, the video corresponding to the music A is played from the beginning in the video area 90175 moved to the center of the screen as the music determination screen at the start of the big hit. In addition, the music A is played from the beginning. By the determination operation, the display of the selection operation image 90176 and the determination image 90177 is erased. Here, the music selection operation at the start of the big hit can be performed during the period from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. If neither the selection operation nor the determination operation is performed by the end of the second round, the video and sound corresponding to the initially set music A will be played from the end of the second round. Further, when only the selection operation is executed and the two rounds are completed without the determination operation being executed, the video and sound of the music corresponding to the item selected by the selection operation are output.

From the state of FIG. 59 (c), at the start of the third round, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the video corresponding to the music A is continuously played in the video area 90175 in the center of the screen, and the sound corresponding to the music A is output. Will be done. At the start of the third round, the selection operation image 90176 is displayed again at the bottom of the screen. Then, when the player operates the stick controller, the music selection screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 59 (e). In this way, the second music selection screen is displayed based on the player's operation. In the first music selection screen, the valid period of the operation is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and in the second music selection screen, the valid period of the operation is from the start of the third round to the final. It is set up to a round (16 rounds). It should be noted that these periods may be set in any way, the selectable period may be three or more times, and the selection operation may not be performed during any of the rounds.

In the music selection screen of FIG. 59 (e), as compared with the music selection screen at the start of the big hit in FIG. 59 (a), the character of the first selection image 90170 corresponding to the item of music A is "A". It has been changed from the indicated character to the "back" character. Also, the currently selected "back" first-selected image 90170 is bordered and displayed. Further, from the state of FIG. 59 (d), the video and sound corresponding to the music A are continuously flowing. In addition, the determined image 90177 is newly displayed. From such a state, when the stick controller is operated and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a bordered state as shown in FIG. 59 (f). Further, an image corresponding to the music B flows in the image area 90175 from the chorus portion. However, even if such a selection operation is performed, the sound of the music A is still output.

When the music A is selected from the state of FIG. 59 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 59 (g). In FIG. 59 (g), since the item of the music A corresponding to the first selection image 90170 indicated by “return” in FIG. 59 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to A is continuously reproduced in the video area 90175. .. In addition, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. On the other hand, when the music B is selected from the state of FIG. 59 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 59 (h). In FIG. 59 (h), since the item of the music B corresponding to the second selection image 90171 indicated by “B” is selected in FIG. 59 (f), the video corresponding to B is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175. .. Also, the sound of music B is reproduced from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), at the start of the big hit, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the player can change the item selected by the selection operation. In addition, by the selection operation, the music and the video corresponding to the selected item are output. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "returning" even when the item corresponding to the music A is being executed. In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is played from the beginning.

In this way, it is possible to confirm what is in the other selection items while playing the music corresponding to the music A. Then, even if the music A is re-determined, the music A is not played from the beginning and continues to flow from the middle. Therefore, even if the selected music is selected again, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. More specifically, when a song that has already been selected is selected again, it may be annoying if the song is played from the beginning, and there is a risk that the interest will be reduced. However, by the above processing, even when the selected music is selected again, it is possible to prevent the music from being played from the beginning, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the selection effect of selecting an item can be executed during the jackpot state. Therefore, even when the selected song is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the big hit state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the music selection effect for selecting a musical piece includes a selection effect at the start of a round executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of a big hit and as shown in FIG. 59 (d). Includes a selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation when the three rounds are disclosed. In this way, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the jackpot state, the player's preference such as selecting a song in the second selection effect without selecting a song in the first selection effect is met. The selection effect can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the first selection effect at the start of the round is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and the second selection effect at the start of the third round is at the start of the third round. It is set from to the final round. Therefore, by prolonging the executable period of the second selection effect to be executed based on the player's operation, it is possible to deal with various types of players such as the fact that the first selection operation could not be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the music playable, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), in the selection effect at the start of the round, the items are set based on the operation of the player. When changed, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 59 (e) and 59 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is It does not change. In this way, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable due to the frequent switching of the music.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the items corresponding to the currently executed music is different from the display of "A" in the selection effect at the start of the round. Display with "Back". In this way, it is possible to show the player which song is currently playing in an easy-to-understand manner.

It should be noted that the pending continuous effect may be executed for the above-mentioned selection effect. For example, it is assumed that the hold continuous effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings in the round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. In this way, the player can be surprised at the first selection effect of selecting the music at the start of the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, if there is no determination operation of the player until the end of the second round, the hold continuous production may be executed at the timing when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command at the end of the second round. .. Further, instead of the selection effect at the start of the big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing operated by the player in the second selection effect at the start of the third round. If the player does not perform the selection operation from the selection effect at the start of the third round to the final round, even if the hold continuous effect is executed at the timing after the executable period of the selection effect ends. Good.

Further, regarding the jackpot state as an advantageous state, a normal jackpot as a first advantageous state and a probabilistic jackpot as a second advantageous state which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state may be provided. Then, a probabilistic promotion effect that promotes to a probabilistic jackpot during a normal jackpot may be executed. For example, it is assumed that the probabilistic promotion effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings in the round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. In this way, the player can be surprised at the selection effect of selecting the music at the start of the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the case of the probabilistic promotion effect, the execution timing may be determined at the start of the big hit. Then, as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, there may be a plurality of timings at the time of selecting a song, at the result of the fanning effect of the fixed probabilistic promotion effect of 11R to 13, and at the ending (after the end of 16R). Good. When the timing at the time of selecting a song is determined by a predetermined random number lottery from these three patterns, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed in the selection effect of selecting the song at the start of the big hit.

Further, a plurality of jackpots having different rounds may be provided, and the present invention may be applied to a round promotion effect in which a jackpot with a small number of rounds is promoted to a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

Further, depending on the type of the selected music, the display mode of the immersive prevention image may be different in the ending period after the end of the big hit.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a music selection process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot music selection process is executed in the effect control process process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101). In the jackpot music selection process, when it is a jackpot, the process for the effect shown in FIG. 59 is executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

In the jackpot music selection process, first, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the current round is in the period of 1R to 2R (S90601). When it is determined that the current round is in the period of 1R to 2R (Y in S90601), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the initial music determination flag is set (S90602). When the initial music determination flag is set (Y in S90602), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90602, when the initial music determination flag is not set (N in S90602), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the music change period (S90603), and determines that it is the music change period. In the case (Y in S90603), it is determined whether or not there is a selection operation (S90604). On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 determines that it is not the music change period (N in S90603), it stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90604, when it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90604), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the music from the chorus according to the music selection (S90605). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90604), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90606 after S90605, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not there is a determination operation (S90606). When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90606), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the determined music from the beginning (S90607). Next, the initial music determination flag is set (S90608), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90606), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90601, when it is determined that the current round is not the period of 1R to 2R, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the final music determination flag is set (S90610). When the final music determination flag is set (Y in S90610), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final music determination flag is not set (N in S90610), the effect control CPU 90101 displays the music change screen (S90611). Next, it is determined whether or not the screen change flag is set (S90612).

In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is not set (N in S90612), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not there is a change operation (S90613). When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that there is no change operation (N in S90613), the video and music corresponding to the initial music are played as they are (S90616), and various data are stored in the storage area (S90609). End the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 determines that there is a change operation (Y in S90613), the screen flag is set (S90614), and the music selection screen in which the initial music is "returned" is displayed (S90615). , S90617. In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is set (Y in S90612), the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to S90617 without performing the processing of S90613 to S90615.

In S90617, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the music change period. When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that it is the music change period (Y in S90617), it determines whether or not there is a selection operation (S90618). In S90617, when it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. When the effect control CPU 90101 determines that there is a selection operation (Y in S90618), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video corresponding to the selected music from the chorus and plays the initial music as it is (S90619). Then, it shifts to S90620. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90618), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90620, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not there is a determination operation. When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90620), the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the initial music has been determined (S90621). In S90620, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90620), the effect control CPU 90101 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. In S90621, when the initial music is determined (Y in S90621), the video corresponding to the initial music is played continuously and the initial music is played as it is (S90622). Next, the final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 is not determined as the initial music (N in S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 reproduces the video corresponding to the changed music from the beginning and reproduces the changed music from the beginning (S90623). Next, the final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends.

The music may be changed many times between the 3Rs and the final round. Specifically, the processes of S90610 and S90624 may not be executed.

[Modification example, etc.]
Next, modification examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.

In the above-described embodiment, the alert regarding the prevention of immersiveness may be executed by the output of sound or the emission of light. Then, not only the display mode but also the sound and light modes may be different depending on the situation in which the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement is executed. The mode of only the sound and the light may be changed without changing the display, or the mode of the combination of the display and the light may be changed although the sound is the same.

In the above-described embodiment, the alert regarding the prevention of immersiveness may be executed at a timing other than the timing of the customer waiting demonstration state or the jackpot game state. For example, a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness may be executed during the variable display. In such a case, a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness may be issued over a plurality of fluctuations, or may be issued within a single fluctuation. In addition, the timing for issuing a warning regarding prevention of immersiveness may be the timing of the first rotation after the end of the time reduction, the first timing in the morning when the power is turned on, or the timing when the fluctuation display is executed 1000 times. ..

In the above-described embodiment, it may be possible to change the frequency, timing, scene, etc. of executing the caution regarding the prevention of entanglement on the player side or the store side. For example, a player who does not play a game until he / she is originally too enthusiastic may feel uncomfortable with the alert regarding prevention of immersiveness. Therefore, the player may be able to restrict the execution of the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement from the menu screen by using an operation means such as the push button 90120.

In the above-described embodiment, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness can be displayed in the same display period as the other warning display, and after the other warning display is faded in, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness is faded in. The display was controlled. However, it is also possible to fade in another warning display after the warning display related to prevention of immersiveness is faded in first. In this way, it is possible to extend the display period of the warning display regarding the prevention of immersiveness.

In the above-described embodiment, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness can be displayed in the same display period as the other warning display, and after the other warning display is faded in, the warning display related to the prevention of immersiveness is faded in. The display was controlled. However, after the warning display for preventing entanglement and the other warning display are faded in at the same timing, one of the displays may be faded out first.

In the above-described embodiment, the warning display for preventing entanglement and other warning displays may be faded in at the same timing and then faded out at the same timing. In addition, the display mode may be different depending on whether the warning display for preventing entanglement and another warning display are faded in (or faded out) at the same time and faded in (or faded out) at different timings. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed after the ending image 90138 and the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed at the end of the jackpot game state has been described. Then, after the entanglement prevention image 90136 and the entanglement prevention image 90137 were once erased, the entanglement prevention image 90131 together with the manufacturer image 90139 was displayed again. However, the entanglement prevention image displayed when the ending image 90138 is displayed may continue to be displayed until the display of the manufacturer image 90139 is completed. Specifically, the display of the ending image 90138 and the image for preventing forgetting to take 90137 may be switched to the display of the manufacturer image 90139 while the immersive prevention image is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed after the ending image 90138 and the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 are displayed at the end of the jackpot game state has been described. However, after displaying the ending image 90138 at the end of the jackpot game state, the manufacturer image 90139 may be displayed, and then the forgotten removal prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 may be displayed. Then, when the big hits are continuous, the manufacturer image 90139 may be displayed in the second and subsequent big hits, and then the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the entanglement prevention image 90136 may not be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display period of the immersive prevention image is shorter in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state has been described. However, the display period of the immersive prevention image may be shorter in the customer waiting demo state than in the ending period after the end of the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to preferably execute the warning display by lengthening the display period during the ending period.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display area of the entanglement prevention image is smaller in the ending period after the end of the big hit than in the customer waiting demonstration state has been described. However, the display area of the entanglement prevention image may be smaller in the customer waiting demo state than in the ending period after the big hit. In this way, the warning display can be suitably executed during the ending period.

In the above-described embodiment, the same material may be used as the material for the immersive prevention image in the customer waiting demonstration state and in the ending period after the end of the big hit. In this way, the data capacity can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the display position of the entanglement prevention image is displayed at a position that is less conspicuous during the ending period after the end of the jackpot than in the customer waiting demonstration state has been described. However, the display position of the entanglement prevention image may be displayed in a less conspicuous position in the customer waiting demo state than in the ending period after the end of the big hit. In this way, the display position during the ending period can be made conspicuous, and the warning display can be preferably executed.

In the above-described embodiment, during the customer waiting demonstration state, a warning regarding prevention of entanglement may always be executed at the corner of the screen. Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the start-up prize is generated and the demonstration state is completed, the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement may be terminated immediately, or the reminder regarding the prevention of entanglement for a predetermined period after the start-up prize is generated. May be terminated after executing.

In the above-described embodiment, another warning display as shown in FIG. 55 (h) may be executed during the ending period of the jackpot. Even in such a case, the ending image is first displayed as the ending image, information about the game such as the mode display and the number of probability changes (or the number of time reductions) after the big hit is displayed, and then other warning displays are displayed. You can do it. Further, the other warning display may be displayed after the manufacturer image 90139 is displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 and the immersive prevention image 90136 are displayed in the first big hit, and the forgotten to be taken in the second and subsequent big hits in a row. The case where the prevention image 90137 is not displayed and only the entanglement prevention image 90136 is displayed has been described. However, the mode of alerting is not different between the first jackpot and the second and subsequent jackpots, and the mode of alerting may be different between the second jackpot and the third and subsequent jackpots, and the jackpot is predetermined. The mode of alerting may be different on the condition that the number of times is continuous. For example, when the jackpot hits up to 5 times, the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 is not displayed, only the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed, and when the jackpot continues 5 times or more, the immersive prevention image 90136 is also displayed together with the forget-to-take prevention image 90137. You may limit it so that it is not done.

In the above-described embodiment, a sudden probability change jackpot may be provided, which is controlled in the probability change state but cannot obtain a ball. Then, when the probability change big hit is suddenly controlled, the entanglement prevention image 90136 may not be displayed together with the forget-to-take prevention image 90137 regardless of the first big hit or the continuous big hit. In this way, when the unfavorable jackpot is won, the mode may be different from that when the advantageous jackpot is won.

In the above-described embodiment, the forgotten prevention image 90137 is not displayed at the time of the probability variation jackpot, only the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed, and the immersive prevention image 90137 is displayed at the time of the normal jackpot, and the immersive prevention image 90136 is displayed. May be displayed. In this way, the mode of alerting may be different depending on the type of jackpot.

In the above-described embodiment, the immersive prevention image having the same displayed character content can be displayed on the effect display device 909 in both the customer waiting demo state and the ending period. However, the immersive prevention image is not limited to the one in which the contents of the characters are exactly the same, and may be in another mode as long as the expressions are similar and the same information is transmitted.

In the above-described embodiment, the execution mode of calling attention regarding prevention of immersiveness on the menu screen differs depending on the type of character selected before being controlled to the jackpot game state. However, depending on the type of character selected before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the execution mode of alerting regarding prevention of immersiveness in the ending period after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be different. In addition, a plurality of types of production modes can be set in the normal game state, and the execution mode of alerting regarding prevention of immersiveness during the customer waiting demo state or the ending period may be different depending on the set mode. ..

In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the entanglement prevention image as a reminder and the sound output corresponding to the entanglement prevention display may be included. Then, a common image may be displayed as the entanglement prevention image depending on the mode selected by the player, and different sounds may be output as the sound corresponding to the entanglement prevention display.

In the above-described embodiment, a switch that can set whether or not to display the immersive prevention image may be provided. For example, such a switch may be provided at a predetermined position on the effect control board 9080. Then, when the power is turned on with the switch turned on, it is sufficient to enable the setting of whether or not to execute the power saving mode and the setting of whether or not to display the immersive prevention image. In this way, it is possible for the amusement store side to appropriately call attention to the prevention of entanglement. In addition to the presence or absence of the display of the entanglement prevention image, an operation means capable of changing the display size and the display position of the entanglement prevention image may be separately provided.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, at the time of initialization, the screen from the head of the three symbol display, which is the first timing of the customer waiting demo state, is displayed, and at the time of power failure recovery, the customer waiting demo state is in progress. The case where it is displayed from the screen of the timing when the other warning display and the immersive prevention display are executed, which is the timing of. However, it suffices that the timing for executing the warning regarding the prevention of entanglement is different between the time of initialization and the time of recovery from the power failure, and may be different timings. For example, the normal background may be displayed for about 15 seconds at the time of initialization, then the customer waiting demo state may be started, and the immersive prevention display may be executed at the final timing. Further, when the power is restored, the immersive prevention display may be executed without executing the other warning display.

In the above-described embodiment, the immersive prevention display may be displayed larger in the center of the screen in the customer waiting demo state of FIG. 55 than in the display of the menu screen of FIG. 56. In this way, it is possible to suitably carry out a warning regarding prevention of entanglement according to the situation. It should be noted that the display area of the immersive prevention display may be larger when the menu screen is displayed than when the customer waiting demonstration state is displayed. Further, the visibility from the player may be different due to the difference in the display position of the immersive prevention display between the customer waiting demo state and the display of the menu screen.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect during the customer waiting demonstration state is continued even during the power saving mode in which the screen brightness is reduced. However, during the power saving mode, the effect during the customer waiting demo state may not be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, the immersive prevention image may be always displayed during the customer waiting demonstration state. In such a case, the display of the entanglement prevention image may be erased in the power saving mode. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the motivation to move from being significantly reduced during the power saving mode by preventing the immersive prevention image from being further displayed during the power saving mode.

In the above-described embodiment, the music change is described as a selection effect that can be selected and operated by the player. However, the effect changed by the selected effect may be something other than a musical piece. For example, the effect changed by the selection effect may be an effect of changing the background, an effect of changing the image, an effect of changing the character, or the like. In such a case, if what was once selected is selected again, the effect may be taken over. Specifically, in a gaming machine that can reserve to change the background by operating a push button, I tried to change the background, but when I wanted to keep the current background, the production with the current background is It may be continued (for example, music in the current background is continuously played).

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music selection effect can be executed during the jackpot has been described. However, the music selection effect may be executed during the rush hour, or may be executed in the non-KT state. In such a case, a plurality of periods during which the selection effect can be executed are provided, and the music is divided into a period when the number of fluctuations is small (1 to 10 times) and a period when the number of fluctuations is large (70 to 100 times). The selection effect of may be executed. In addition, the selection effect may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration. For example, the menu screen can be opened by operating the push button during the customer waiting demonstration, and the volume and light amount of the pachinko gaming machine can be adjusted in the menu screen, and the execution frequency of the production can be changed. Good.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the case where the currently executed item is changed to the character “return” has been described. However, instead of changing to characters, the currently executed item may have a different color or shape.

In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music is reproduced from the chorus portion of the music has been described. Depending on the music, the part other than the "rust" (such as the verse) may be reproduced, or the part reproduced by the music may be different.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker opening is repeated, that is, a round gaming period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period of repeating the attacker opening (round game period), and an ending effect period executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit game state and notifies that the big hit game state has been reached. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state to notify the end of the jackpot game state.

In the above-mentioned various control of music selection, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop button is operated by the player. If the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped, it can be applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. In the slot machine, the immersive prevention display may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration state and when the advantageous state such as the big bonus or AT for the player ends. Further, in the slot machine, a music selection or determination operation may be executed by a push button or a cross key provided on the housing.

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

As an embodiment of this, a gaming machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand when a prize is generated has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid to the player's hand when the prize is generated. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without giving out may be adopted. The enclosed gaming machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a gaming medium, in the gaming machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case has been shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols or effect symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is limited to such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% has been described as a specific example as the “ratio (ratio, probability)”. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , The case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0% is also included.

In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. An example of probabilistic state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 9020, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko game machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device (main display device)
9a 1st hold storage display 9b 2nd hold storage display 9F Active display 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd starting winning opening 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko game machine 909 Production display device 90100 Production control microcomputer 90560 Game control microcomputer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Equipped with a specific display execution means that can display a specific display corresponding to the variable display
The specific display execution means is
It is possible to suggest that the advantageous state is controlled by changing the display mode of the specific display to any one of a plurality of types after executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes. Yes,
Start the display after the change in the timing of changing the specific display of the display mode, after starting the display after said alteration, it is capable of displaying specific indication in a manner with the post-change display for a predetermined period of time,
Even in the state accompanied by the display after the change, the specific display can be displayed so that it can be recognized which display mode the specific display has changed to.
The suggestion effect is performed over a common period regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state.
When the display period of the post-change display is long, the advantageous state is controlled at a higher rate than when the display period of the post-change display is short.
Display means and
Further provided with a warning means capable of displaying a warning image regarding prevention of immersiveness in the game on the display means.
The alerting means is
It is possible to display a warning image regarding prevention of entanglement in the standby state where the demonstration can be displayed and when the advantageous state ends on the display means.
The caution image is displayed on the display means in different modes depending on whether the standby state is in the standby state or the advantageous state is finished.
The waiting and the gaming machine power interruption in the state, In no event where the game machine is controlled in the standby state after recovery from power interruption, the display of the caution image from being controlled in the standby state and time to be displayed on the unit, to said game machine is displayed in no event, which is controlled from being initialized to the standby state, the reminder pictures is controlled in the standby state on the display means and wherein varying the period, the game machine.

Images